JP2019122697A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can prevent a setting unintended by a player and which can preferably operate second control means.SOLUTION: A game machine 1 in which a game can be played includes performance execution means 101 capable of executing a performance relating to a game, and setting means for making setting relating to a performance on the basis of operation of a player. The performance execution means 101 can execute a performance at different advancing speeds in a first period and a second period different from the first period, and the speed relating to the setting in the setting means does not change between the first period and the second period. In addition, a performance control board converts the variation pattern designation commands "8101" to "8102" into a variation pattern designation command "8100", thereby treating the variation pattern designation commands "8100" to "8102" as the same command and executing a step S90171.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  Some conventional gaming machines execute effects during a game at different speeds in the first and second periods, and indicate whether they are controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, , Patent Document 1).

  Further, some conventional gaming machines can set settings related to effects such as volume and light amount by receiving an operation of a player or the like (for example, see Patent Document 2).

JP, 2012-217841, A JP, 2017-006552, A

  However, if setting regarding effects is enabled in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 as in Patent Document 2, the progressing speed of the settings changes during execution of setting regarding effects, and settings not intended by the player are There is a problem of being done.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a setting unintended by a player.

In order to solve the above-mentioned subject, the game machine according to the means 1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Effect execution means capable of executing effects (for example, pending change effects) relating to a game (for example, a portion that executes effect symbol fluctuation processing after the effect control CPU 101 executes preview advance notice processing);
Setting means (for example, the effect control CPU 101 shown in FIG. 33) performs settings relating to effects based on the player's operation (for example, operation of the operating lever or push button 120, trigger button 125, volume / light amount change button 50). A part that executes player setting processing),
Equipped with
The effect executing means can execute effects at different traveling speeds in a first period (for example, when non-execution of deceleration control) and a second period (for example, when deceleration control is performed) different from the first period. (For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the portion where the hold change presentation is executed at a slower speed (slow motion) than when the deceleration control is not executed)
The speed regarding the setting in the setting means does not change between the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, a series of output from the speaker 27 when the volume is changed) The output of a series of sample lights output from the frame LED 28 when the sample sound and the light quantity are changed is ended in a fixed period, that is, a part output at a fixed speed),
further,
First control means (for example, the main substrate 9011) for outputting a command based on a lottery (for example, a variation pattern specification command);
And second control means (for example, effect control board 9012) for executing processing (for example, step S90171 which is processing for effect execution) according to the command output from the first control means.
The second control unit treats a plurality of different commands (for example, variation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102”) as the same command (for example, variation pattern designation command “8100”) and executes the processing (for example, In step S90752, the variation pattern designation commands “8101” to “8102” are converted into “8100” (see also FIG. 66), treated as “8100”, and step S90171 is executed).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the setting unintended by the player being performed. Further, since the processing is performed by treating a plurality of different commands as the same command, the second control means can be suitably operated.

  Note that the first control unit and the second control unit may be configured by a plurality of hardware (substrate or processor). Further, at least a part of the first control means and the second control means may be configured by a common hardware configuration.

  For example, in the embodiment described later, the main substrate 9011 is provided with a portion for converting the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” into the fluctuation pattern “8100” (a portion where the common module 90120A executes steps S90751 to S90752). It is also good. In this case, for example, the CPU 90103 randomly determines a variation pattern and generates a variation pattern specification command (which is to be output to the RAM 90102). Then, the CPU 90103 performs the same processing as step S90704 to convert the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” into the fluctuation pattern “8100”. Then, the CPU 90103 supplies the converted command to the effect control board 9012. Thus, the second control means may include a portion of the main substrate 9011.

  For example, in the embodiment to be described later, the common module 90120A is realized by a substrate different from the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012 or a processor or the like provided on the effect control substrate 9012 but different from the effect control CPU 90120. You may do so. As described above, the part that handles different plural commands as the same command in the second control means and the part that executes processing may be realized by different hardware.

  The process according to the command may be a process of executing an effect (a process executed by the display control unit 90123) in addition to the process of determining an effect to be executed. In addition, treating a plurality of commands as the same command means treating a plurality of commands as another command other than the plurality of commands in addition to treating the plurality of commands as one of the plurality of commands. Including. Also, treating a plurality of commands as the same command may be realized by converting the command as in the embodiment described later, or executing the same processing for a plurality of commands (thereby making the same command It may be realized by

  In addition, the effect execution means (for example, CPU 120, 90120 for effect control) may be included in the second control means (for example, effect control boards 12, 9012). That is, the second control means, which executes the processing according to the command output by the first control means, can execute the effect (for example, the hold change effect) relating to the game, and the first period (for example, non-execution of the deceleration control) Effect can be performed at different advancing speeds in a second period different from the first period (for example, at the time of execution of deceleration control) (for example, as shown in FIG. It is good also as a part in which a pending change production is performed at a speed (slow motion) slower than the time of non-execution of.

  In addition, the setting means may be included in the second control means (for example, the effect control boards 12 and 9012). That is, the second control means, which executes processing according to the command output by the first control means, may perform setting relating to the effect.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1;
The setting means is a specific image display means (for example, the effect control CPU 101) capable of displaying a specific image (for example, a volume meter, a light amount meter, a volume / light amount adjustment screen) regarding a setting that changes based on the player's operation. 34 and a portion for executing the player setting process shown in FIG.
The speed at which the specific image changes in the specific image display means does not change between the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 39, regardless of whether deceleration control is performed or not). It is characterized in that the volume meter, the light quantity meter, and the part where the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is updated in 2 ms.
According to this feature, it is possible to display an appropriate specific image corresponding to the setting.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2;
The setting means is a specific image display means (for example, the effect control CPU 101) capable of displaying a specific image (for example, a volume meter, a light amount meter, a volume / light amount adjustment screen) regarding a setting that changes based on the player's operation. 34 and a portion for executing the player setting process shown in FIG.
The specific image display means limits the display of the specific image in the second period (for example, as shown in the third modification, when the volume / light quantity change button 50 is operated during execution of the deceleration control) , While updating the volume and light quantity, the effect display device 9 does not display the volume meter and light quantity meter according to the update of the volume and light quantity)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by the effect being executed at a speed different from the change speed of the specific image.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 3, wherein
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute setting effects (for example, output of sample sound and sample light) corresponding to the setting performed by the setting means,
The setting effect can be performed in a manner common to the first period and the second period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, a series of operations can be performed regardless of whether deceleration control is being performed or not. (A part that outputs the sample sound in the period T4 or a part that outputs a series of sample light in the period T5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood as not being a setting effect by the aspect of the setting effect being different.
The “mode” includes an execution speed, a pitch, a period until the setting effect is started, an execution period of the setting effect, and the like.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 3;
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute setting effects (for example, output of sample sound and sample light) corresponding to the setting performed by the setting means,
In the second period, the execution of the setting effect is limited (for example, as shown in the fourth modification, when the volume / light quantity change button 50 is operated during the execution of the deceleration control, the volume / light quantity change button) Part that does not perform output of sample sound or sample light with changed volume and light quantity based on 50 operations)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by performing the setting effect in the second period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine according to means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5, and
Error notification means for notifying that an error has occurred (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 101 executes the lower tray error detection process shown in FIG. 32);
The setting means can set the effect even during the execution of the notification by the error notification means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, regardless of whether or not the lower plate error is notified) Part that can change the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 and the light amount of the light output from the frame LED 28)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the convenience of the player regarding setting from being lowered.

The gaming machine according to means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6, wherein
When the setting by the setting means is performed in the second period, the effect executing means performs the effect corresponding to the setting in the second period (for example, from the speaker 27 during the execution of the deceleration control) When changing the volume of the sound to be output and the light amount of the light output from the frame LED 28, the portion to output the volume and the light amount changed from during the hold change effect for which the deceleration control is being performed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the effect in which the setting of the player is reflected is performed also in the second period, the interest of the effect can be improved.

A gaming machine according to means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7.
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A specific display unit (for example, the hold display area 18c or the active display area AHA) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, the active display AH or the hold display H) corresponding to the variable display
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect of changing the display mode of the specific display by causing the action display to act on the specific display (for example, as shown in FIG. 17, the color ball 931 is actively displayed as a hold change effect) An effect of changing the display mode of the active display AH or the hold display H which is targeted by acting on the AH or the hold display H),
The display of the action display is started, and the first pattern (for example, the success pattern shown in FIG. 17C) for changing the display mode of the specific display after a predetermined period has elapsed and the display of the action display is started. It is possible to execute a second pattern (for example, a failure pattern shown in FIG. 17D) which does not change the display mode of the specific display after the period has elapsed,
It is possible to execute deceleration control to reduce the speed of the action display with respect to the target specific display at a common timing in a predetermined period of the first pattern and the second pattern after the display of the action display is started. A part (for example, as shown in FIG. 17B, a portion to start the deceleration of the color ball 931 at the same timing at the success and failure)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the action display.

  The present invention may have only the invention specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has the configuration other than the invention specific matters together with the invention specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the following means 9-means 20 is included in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a first control means (main control unit 310) for outputting a command based on a lottery as shown in JP 2007-130191 A, and a command outputted by the first control means And a second control unit (sub control unit 340) that executes processing according to (variation pattern command). However, for example, in the development of the above-described gaming machine, a command (for example, a command indicating a fluctuation pattern) output by the first control means may be prepared in advance in a large amount (because adding it later complicates the operation) As a result, commands may be left over the processing that the second control means can perform (for example, commands may be left over the fluctuation pattern actually used). In such a case, for example, there may occur a disadvantage that the second control means can not operate the second control means suitably for the surplus commands (for example, a disadvantage that there is no effect to be executed based on the surplus commands). In the gaming machine, such a disadvantage is not taken into consideration. As in this example, in the conventional gaming machine, there has been a problem that the second control means can not be suitably operated for a predetermined command. In view of this point, provision of a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the second control means is required.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of means 9 according to another aspect is:
First control means (for example, the main substrate 9011) for outputting a command based on a lottery (for example, a variation pattern specification command);
And second control means (for example, effect control board 9012) for executing processing (for example, step S90171 which is processing for effect execution) according to the command output from the first control means.
The second control unit treats a plurality of different commands (for example, variation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102”) as the same command (for example, variation pattern designation command “8100”) and executes the processing (for example, In step S90752, the fluctuation pattern designation commands "8101" to "8102" are converted into "8100" (see also Fig. 66), and the step is treated as "8100" to execute step S90171),
It is characterized by

  Note that the first control unit and the second control unit may be configured by a plurality of hardware (substrate or processor). Further, at least a part of the first control means and the second control means may be configured by a common hardware configuration.

  For example, in the embodiment described later, the main substrate 9011 is provided with a portion for converting the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” into the fluctuation pattern “8100” (a portion where the common module 90120A executes steps S90751 to S90752). It is also good. In this case, for example, the CPU 90103 randomly determines a variation pattern and generates a variation pattern specification command (which is to be output to the RAM 90102). Then, the CPU 90103 performs the same processing as step S90704 to convert the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” into the fluctuation pattern “8100”. Then, the CPU 90103 supplies the converted command to the effect control board 9012. Thus, the second control means may include a portion of the main substrate 9011.

  For example, in the embodiment to be described later, the common module 90120A is realized by a substrate different from the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012 or a processor or the like provided on the effect control substrate 9012 but different from the effect control CPU 90120. You may do so. As described above, the part that handles different plural commands as the same command in the second control means and the part that executes processing may be realized by different hardware.

  The process according to the command may be a process of executing an effect (a process executed by the display control unit 90123) in addition to the process of determining an effect to be executed. In addition, treating a plurality of commands as the same command means treating a plurality of commands as another command other than the plurality of commands in addition to treating the plurality of commands as one of the plurality of commands. Including. Also, treating a plurality of commands as the same command may be realized by converting the command as in the embodiment described later, or executing the same processing for a plurality of commands (thereby making the same command It may be realized by

  According to such a configuration, since the processing is performed by treating a plurality of different commands as the same command, the second control means can be suitably operated.

The gaming machine of means 10 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to means 9, wherein
The plurality of commands include a first command (for example, variation pattern specification command “8100”) and a second command (for example, variation pattern specification command “8101”).
The second control means is
Treat the second command as the first command (see, for example, FIG. 66)
The same kind of operation is received when the first command is received from the first control means, and when the second command is received from the first control means and the received second command is treated as the first command. The same processing is executed regardless of whether the variation pattern designation command “8100” is converted from “8101” or not by executing the effect at the same rate (for example, by step S90171 etc.) Perform various types of image effects (reach effect, advance notice, variable display of decorative pattern) at the same rate),
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated.

The gaming machine according to the means 11 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to the means 9 or the means 10, wherein
The plurality of commands include a first command (for example, variation pattern specification command “8100”) and a second command (for example, variation pattern specification command “8101”).
The second control means treats the second command as the first command (for example, see FIG. 66)
The first command and the second command are commands output by lottery referring to the same table (for example, the variation pattern designation commands “8100” and “8101” are the same table as shown in FIG. 58). As a command specifying the variation pattern selected in the referred lottery (output based on the lottery),
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the relationship between the first command and the second command can be easily grasped.

The gaming machine of means 12 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to means 11,
The ratio at which the first command is output is the highest in all the lotterys including the lottery or the lottery (for example, see FIGS. 57 to 58),
The ratio at which the second command is output is the lowest in the lottery or all the lottery including the lottery (for example, see FIGS. 57 to 58),
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the use ratio of the second command can be reduced, and the occurrence of inconvenience caused by a malfunction or the like that can not handle the first command as the second command can be minimized. Further, by treating the second command as the first command having a high determination ratio, adjustment of the determination ratio in the lottery can be facilitated.

The gaming machine according to the means 13 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to the means 9 or the means 10, wherein
The plurality of commands include a first command (for example, variation pattern specification command “8100”) and a second command (for example, variation pattern specification command “8101”).
The second control means treats the second command as the first command (for example, see FIG. 66)
The first command and the second command are commands that are not individually output in lotterys using different tables (see, for example, FIGS. 57 to 58).
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the relationship between the first command and the second command can be easily grasped.

The gaming machine according to means 14 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 13.
The plurality of commands include a first command (for example, variation pattern specification command “8100”) and a second command (for example, variation pattern specification command “8101”).
In the first command and the second command, whether the serial number of the entire command (for example, the serial number attached to each variation pattern) or the value indicated by these commands (for example, the value of the EXT data) is within a predetermined range Belongs to a group that specifies a variation pattern of the same category (for example, non-reach) (for example, see FIG. 56),
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the relationship between the first command and the second command can be easily grasped.

The gaming machine according to means 15 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 14.
The plurality of commands are commands (for example, a variation pattern specification command) indicating an effect pattern (for example, a variation pattern),
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated for frequently used commands.

The gaming machine according to means 16 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 14.
The plurality of commands are commands indicating information used for executing the preview advance notice effect (see, for example, FIG. 67).
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated for frequently used commands.

The gaming machine according to means 17 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 14.
The plurality of commands are commands (for example, a variation pattern specification command) indicating a variation pattern of the variable display (for example, variation pattern),
The plurality of commands (for example, fluctuation patterns “PA1′-1” to “PA1′−3”) treated as the same command are the ones specifying the same fluctuation time (for example, special figure fluctuation time) (for example, As shown in FIG. 56, the variation patterns “PA1′-1” to “PA1′-3” designate the same special figure variation time),
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the same effect (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern) can be performed without a sense of incongruity with each of a plurality of commands.

The gaming machine according to means 18 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 17.
The second control means specifies the other command (for example, variation pattern specification commands “8101” to “8102”) other than the specific command (for example, variation pattern specification command “8100”) among the plurality of commands. Convert into a command and hold it in storage means (for example, a variation pattern designation command storage area) (for example, steps S90752 to S90753),
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated.

The gaming machine according to means 19 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 18.
The first control means is main control means (for example, main board 9011) for controlling the progress of the game,
The second control means is effect control means (for example, effect control board 9012) for controlling the execution of effects.
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the effect control means can be suitably operated.

The gaming machine according to means 20 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 19;
The first control means is a first effect control means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control in a modification) which controls the progress of effects,
The second control means is a second effect control means (for example, a display control unit 90123 in the modification) for controlling the execution of effects.
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the second effect control means can be suitably operated.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure showing a hit classification table. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of a main board (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table and a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the change pattern table used in order to determine a change pattern in a tabular form. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a reservation storage buffer in a microcomputer for game control. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. 5 is a flowchart showing a winning sound output process. It is a flow chart which shows pending display production processing. It is a figure which shows pending change production. It is a figure which shows a pending | holding change presentation execution determination table. It is a figure which shows a pending | holding change aspect determination table. It is a figure which shows the deceleration period determination table. It is a figure which shows a presentation execution timing determination table. It is a flowchart which shows pre-reading advance notice processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is a figure which shows an active pending change presentation. It is a figure which shows an active pending change production | presentation execution determination table. It is a figure which shows an active pending final color determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the start position of an effect, a success rate, and a change rate. It is a timing chart which shows the luminescence mode of the 1st special symbol display, the 2nd special symbol display, and frame LED. It is a flow chart which shows operation production processing. It is a flowchart which shows lower tray error detection processing. It is a flowchart which shows a player setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a player setting process. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the presentation display apparatus at the time of operating a push button in non-variation. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect display apparatus at the time of operating a volume and light quantity change button during a fluctuation | variation. It is a timing chart which shows the output mode of a sample sound. It is a timing chart which shows the output mode of sample light. It is a figure which shows the update aspect of a volume meter and a light quantity meter, and the update aspect of a volume light quantity adjustment screen. It is a timing chart which shows the output mode of a winning a prize sound. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 (one-shot notification) of active pending change presentation. It is a figure showing modification 2 (timer change production) of active pending change production. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution period of timer change production. It is a figure which shows a timer change presentation execution determination table. It is a figure which shows a timer change production execution time determination table. It is a figure which shows the change frequency determination table for timer change presentation. It is a figure which shows the change pattern determination table for timer change presentation. It is a figure which shows the change timing determination table for timer change presentation. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process for timer change production. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in one embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a functional block diagram of CPU etc. for presentation control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the main presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of a loss. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a figure showing an example of processing contents of processing (step S90704) of production control command analysis etc. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern specification command processing. It is an example of a change pattern designation command conversion table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing under variable display. It is a figure explaining the example of conversion of a fluctuation pattern specification command. It is a figure explaining the example of conversion of the command which designates the change pattern (the execution pattern of change production) of the 2nd reservation display picture.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be other gaming machines such as a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. As long as it is a machine, it may be any game machine.

  An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a hit classification table.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a game is performed by striking a gaming ball as a gaming medium into the gaming area 7. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play space is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (games described later And the board 6). In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game is performed by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the bat supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball tray 4 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the bat supply tray 3, a bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 for emitting a bat, and the like. In addition, the game board 6 is detachably attached to the back of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes it and various components attached to the plate-like body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 where the driven game balls can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (rod shape) at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is attached a stick controller 122 which can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). In the stick controller 122, a predetermined operation finger (for example, a forefinger or the like) is pressed and pulled in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 122 with the operation hand (for example, left hand or the like). A trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3) that can perform an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 121 (FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by pushing or pulling the trigger button 125 See) is built-in. In addition, a tilting direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod is provided in the inside of the main body of the lower tray at the lower part of the stick controller 122 or the like. In addition, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122. The surplus supply receiving tray (lower tray) 4 is also provided with a lower tray sensor 130 capable of detecting that a predetermined number of gaming balls have been stored in the lower tray 4.

  On the member forming the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by the player or the like. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the operation performed by the player on the push button 120 may be provided inside the body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 120 or the like. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in the upper and lower positional relationship in the central portion of the upper and lower dishes. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be shifted to either the left or the right in the upper and lower plates while maintaining the upper and lower positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in the vertical positional relationship, but may be in the horizontal positional relationship, for example. As the operation means, a lever switch and other operation means such as a jog dial may be provided.

  Further, to the member forming the striking ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, the volume and light amount for adjusting (changing) the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 described later and the light amount of the light output from the frame LED 28 A change button 50 is also provided. The volume / light quantity change button 50 in the present embodiment is a button formed in a substantially cross shape in a front view, and the player operates the upper end and the lower end of the volume / light quantity change button 50. The volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 can be changed, and the light amount of the light output from the frame LED 28 can be changed by operating the right end portion and the left end portion of the volume / light amount change button 50 .

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 capable of fluctuating display (also referred to as variable display) of effect symbols as plural types of identification information capable of identifying each of them is provided. On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, a first special symbol display 8a that variably displays the first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each, and a plurality of types that can identify each And a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying a second special symbol as identification information of the second symbol.

  Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is configured by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 9 is configured of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and provided on the display screen is a effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Be In the effect symbol display area, symbol display areas are formed in which, for example, three effect symbols for decoration (for effect) on the left, middle and right are variably displayed.

  Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is controlled by the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 (game control board). The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the fluctuation display, and the second special symbol display 8b is performed by the first special symbol display 8a. (2) When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  When the big hit display result (big hit symbol) as the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, or the big hit display result (big hit symbol) as the specific display result on the second special symbol display 8b When it is derived and displayed, the jackpot display result (combination of big hit symbols) as the specific display result is also derived and displayed on the effect display device 9. As described above, when the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is controlled to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) as the advantageous state in which the player is given an advantageous value (favorable value).

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stop, swing, zoom in / out or deform in the state that matches the combination of symbols, or display multiple symbols in synchronization with the same symbol, or change the position of the display symbol Then, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect design stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitutes a part of the big hit combination, the fluctuation display of the effect design which is not yet stopped is continued. The display state or the display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are variably displayed synchronously while constituting all or part of the big hit combination. In other words, reach refers to a state in which identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least a part of the variable display areas is in a variable display mode. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state in which the same symbol stops in the left and right symbol display areas, and the symbol does not stop in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  And the display production in the reach state is reach production display (reach production). In addition, at the time of reach, the effect which is different from usual is done with the LED and the sound. This effect is called reach effect. In addition, when reaching, a character (effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a symbol (effect symbol etc)) is displayed, or a display mode (for example, color etc.) of a background image of the effect display device 9 ) May be changed. This change in the display of the character and the display mode of the background is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach are set so that a big hit is more likely to occur when they appear, as compared to the normal reach. Such special reach is called super reach.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variation display unit) 8a that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information capable of identifying each is provided. The first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small-sized display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying special symbols such as numerals 0-9. In addition, the second special symbol display (the second special symbol display (second) to the right of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), the second special symbol as identification information that can identify each Variation display unit 8b is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small-sized display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying special symbols such as numerals 0-9.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are generically referred to as a special symbol indicator (variation indicator) There is something to do.

  In addition, although the case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided is shown in the present embodiment, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  The 1st start condition or the 2nd start condition which is the execution condition of the change display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the 1st start winning opening 13 or the 2nd start winning opening) of the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol After having passed 14 (including winnings), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and it is started based on the state in which the big hit game is not executed) being established, and when the fluctuation display time (variation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate in advance, and includes the concept that the gaming ball has entered the winning opening (winning). It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 14 (it becomes easy to get a start prize), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 than the first starting winning hole 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 13 than the second starting winning hole 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win). Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, ie, the second reserve memory number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol suspension storage indicator 18b, the number of activated winning balls entering the first start winning opening 13, ie, the first suspension storage number (pending storage is also referred to as start storage or start prize storage). A first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a consisting of four indicators for displaying) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. If the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 13 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a, it is possible to start the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is ended, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the fluctuation display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 8a, and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the number of first pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, it is possible to start the variable display of the second special symbol (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the second The start condition of 2) is satisfied, and the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 8 b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 14. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Perform variable display of the effect pattern as the symbol of. The variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variation display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. In addition, the variation display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8 b and the variation display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  In addition, a hold storage display unit (total hold storage display unit) displaying the total number of the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number (total hold memory number) at the lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 9 , Hold display area) is provided. In the hold display area, a hold memory number can be specified as a hold memory display, for example, a hold memory image that can be specified by the display number of a predetermined image (by displaying one hold memory image corresponding to each hold memory information Specify the number) is displayed. As described above, by providing the hold display area for displaying the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of formation of execution conditions for which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. In each of the first special symbol holding storage indicator 18a, the second special symbol holding storage indicator 18b, and the effect display 9, the light emission display and the image display for indicating the number of holding storages is a hold display or a hold It is called memory display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the display is derived, the opening / closing plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, whereby the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In the jackpot gaming state, the special variable winning ball device 20 is repeatedly and continuously controlled to repeat the open state and the closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state in which the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is opened is called a round. Thus, the repeat continuation control is also referred to as round control. In this embodiment, a plurality of jackpot types are provided, and when it is determined that a jackpot is to be made, one of the jackpot types is selected.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, an ordinary symbol display 10 for variably displaying an ordinary symbol capable of identifying each of the effect display devices 9 is provided. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Moreover, the small display is formed, for example, in a square shape.

  When the game ball passes the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. Then, when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol. For example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is closed for a predetermined time, which is disadvantageous for the player for a predetermined number of times. Changes to a player's open position. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the game ball passes to the gate 32, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of lighted LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. In the upper left and right upper and lower left of the game area 7, four speakers 27 are provided for producing sound effects and sounds as a predetermined sound output. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a "card unit") that enables ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  In the hit type table in FIG. 2, for each hit type in the big hit, the big hit probability after the end of the big hit gaming state, the base after the end of the big hit gaming state, the fluctuation time after the big hit gaming state end, the number of times open in big hit ( The number of rounds) and the open time of each round are shown.

  Specifically, in the big hit gaming state, after the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is put into the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds in the open state) has elapsed, or, In response to the establishment of the open end condition that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, the closed state is established. Then, when the open end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the jackpot gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round) where the predetermined upper limit is reached.

  Of the "big hit", after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, there is a high probability of being determined to be a big hit as a special gaming state as compared to the normal state (a normal gaming state which is not a definite change state) The type (classification) of the jackpot that shifts to (abbreviation of probability fluctuation state, also referred to as high probability state) is called “probability variation jackpot”. In the present embodiment, the special gaming state may be controlled to a short time state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the production pattern is shorter than the non-short time state, accompanying the probability change state. is there. Note that the special game state may be controlled to be in the time saving state independently of the probability change state.

  In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the rendering symbol is shortened, so when it becomes the time saving state, the effective start winning is likely to occur and the big hit game may be performed. Increase. In addition, the type (class) of the big hit which does not shift to a definite change state after being controlled by the big hit game state of 15 rounds among "big hit" is called "usually big hit".

  Also, as the special gaming state, accompanying the probability changing state or the time saving state, the frequency of the game ball entering the variable winning ball device 15 is increased by increasing the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. There is a case where it is controlled to the electronic control unit control state that facilitates (higher approach, higher frequency) winning on the variable winning ball device 15. Since the electronic control support state is a high base state as described later, it will be mainly referred to as a high base state in the following description.

  Here, the electronic Chu support control will be described. As the electric chew support control, the control (normal symbol shortening control) to reduce the fluctuation time of normal symbol (time from the start of fluctuation display to the derivation display of display result) and derive the display result early (normal symbol shortening control), ordinary symbol Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will hit the symbol (normal symbol probability change control), control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened Control (control to increase the number of times of release) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is higher than when the control is not performed, so that the frequency of winning to the second start winning opening 14 As a result, the game ball is more likely to get a start winning (the condition for executing variable display on the special symbol displays 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is more likely to be established). As a result of this control, the frequency of winning on the second start winning opening 14 is increased, so that the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the frequency of execution of variation display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state (high frequency state) in which the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 14 is increased by the electric chew support control is the ratio of the number of gaming balls paid out as the winning balls according to the winning to the number of firing balls The "base" is referred to as the "high base state" because it is in a higher state than when the control is not performed. Also, when such control is not performed, it is called "low base state". Further, such control is control for facilitating winning on the variable winning ball device 15 by supporting the winning with the variable winning ball device 15, ie, the electric tulip, and is called "electric chew support control".

  In the present embodiment, “high probability state (probability state)” and “low probability state (non-probability state)” are used as terms indicating the state of the big hit probability, and as a term indicating a combination of base states, The "high base state (power chew support control state)" and the "low base state (non-power chew support control state)" are used.

  Also, in the present embodiment, “low probability low base state”, “low probability high base state”, and “high probability high base state” are used as a term indicating the combination of the jackpot probability state and the base state. . The "low probability low base state" is a state indicating that the state of the jackpot probability is a low probability state and the base state is a low base state. The “low probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the jackpot probability is a low probability state and the base state is a high base state. The “high probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the jackpot probability is a high probability state and the base state is a high base state.

  As shown in FIG. 2, as the jackpots of 15 rounds, a plurality of kinds of jackpots, usually a jackpot and a definite variation jackpot, are provided. Usually, the big hit is a big hit controlled to the non-probability state, the short time state, and the high base state (low probability high base state) after the end of the 15 round big hit gaming state. In the normal big hit, the condition that the non-probability state continues until the next big hit occurs, and the time saving state and the high base state are executed a predetermined number of times of the variable display 100 times, and the next big hit And the condition until the condition occurs, whichever is earlier, until the condition is satisfied. The normal jackpot may be controlled to be a jackpot controlled to the non-probability state, the non-time-short state, and the power-less support control state (low probability low base state).

  The probability variation big hit is a jackpot in which control to shift to a probability variation status, a short time status, and a high base status (high probability high base status) is performed after the end of the 15 rounds of jackpot gaming status. In the big change big hit, the condition that the high probability high base state of this kind, until the variable indication is executed predetermined number of times a predetermined number of times or the condition that until the next big hit occurs, the earlier condition is satisfied Continue for a period of time.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board 31 (game control board) and the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. Further, FIG. 3 also shows the payout control board 37 and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control), a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit Including 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source, a part or all of which is created in a power source substrate (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state (i.e., the special symbol process flag etc.) according to the control state of the gaming control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs) the following. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variation display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit (for example, 65535) are set, and occurs at random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number value based on the fact that the start winning is when the numerical data is read out (extracted). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for giving detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. In addition, the solenoid 16 which opens and closes the variable winning prize ball device 15, and the output circuit 59 which drives the solenoid 21 which opens and closes the special variable winning prize ball device 20 which forms the big prize mouth in accordance with the command from the game control microcomputer 560 It is mounted on the substrate 31.

  In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the first special symbol indicator 8a which fluctuates and displays the special symbol, the second special symbol indicator 8b, the normal symbol indicator 10 which fluctuates and displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 is performed.

  The effect control board 80 has the effect control microcomputer 100, the ROM 102, the RAM 103, the VDP 109, the I / O port unit 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control of the effect display device 9.

  The effect control command for instructing effect content from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay substrate 77 which allows the signal to pass only in one direction from the main substrate 31 to the effect control substrate 80 from the main substrate 31. Are received, and variable display control of the effect display device 9 is performed, and display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side is performed via the LED driver substrate 35 or from the speaker 27 via the audio output substrate 70. Perform various kinds of effect control such as controlling the sound output of

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the trigger sensor 121 to the input port of the I / O port unit 105. Enter through. The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected, from the push sensor 124 via the input port of the I / O port unit 105. Do. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation with respect to the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 and an input of the I / O port unit 105. Enter via port. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the stick controller 122 to vibrate by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port of the I / O port unit 105.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 receives the operation detection signal of the volume / light amount adjustment button 50, the push button 120, and the trigger button 125, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 or the light output from the frame LED 28. The amount of light can be changed. Furthermore, the effect control CPU 101 can determine that a predetermined number of gaming balls are stored in the lower tray 4 based on the reception of the detection signal from the lower tray sensor 130.

  In addition to the program for effect control, various data tables used for controlling the effect operation and the like are stored in the ROM 102 mounted on the effect control board 80. For example, in the ROM 102, a plurality of determination tables prepared to make various determinations, determinations and settings by the effect control CPU 101, table data forming the determination tables, pattern data forming the various effect control patterns, etc. It is memorized. The effect control pattern is, for example, process data including effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, LED control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, an end code, etc. It consists of The RAM 103 mounted on the effect control board 80 stores various data used to control the effect operation.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing each random number. In FIG. 4, the type of random number, the update range, the application, and the addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

  (1) Random R: A random counter for determining whether or not to make a big hit. The random R is updated one by one at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated from 0 again. (2) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of big hit (type, normal big hit, and any kind of probability variation big hit) and the big hit symbol (for big hit type determination, for big hit symbol determination). (3) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4 (MR 4): It is determined whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5 (MR 5): The initial value of random 4 is determined (for random 4 initial value determination).

  In the present embodiment, as a big hit that is a specific gaming state, a plurality of types are usually included: a big hit and a probability variation big hit. Therefore, when it is determined to be a big hit based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), the type of the big hit is any of these big hits based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1). It is decided on the type. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) at the same time. Therefore, random 1 is also a jackpot symbol determination random number.

  In addition, first, the variation pattern type is determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and the variation pattern is included in the determined variation pattern type using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) Determine the fluctuation pattern of As such, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is one in which a plurality of variation patterns are grouped according to the feature of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type. The variation pattern type may be called a variation type.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation patterns are classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type without a reach and a reach fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type with a reach.

  Such a variation pattern type is set to be different because the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different between the time saving state and the time non-saving state, when the display result is a loss. , The fluctuation time is shortened compared to when not in the time saving state. For example, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than that in the time shortening, in order to shorten the average time of fluctuation time as compared with the time not being time saving state. The rate at which the variation pattern type with a short time is selected increases, and even when the reach type is selected, the rate at which the variation pattern of normal reach with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types is set to be high. By doing this, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than when not in the short time state.

  In addition, such fluctuation pattern classification is set by the fact that the selection ratio differs when the number of pending storages of each special symbol which fluctuates indicates more than predetermined number and when it is less than predetermined number, When the number of pending storages of each special symbol to display variable is more than a predetermined number, compared to the case where the number of pending storages of each special symbol is less than a predetermined number, the control for reducing the number of holdings is performed. You may do it. For example, in the pending number reduction control state, the rate at which the variation pattern type having a short variation display time such as the normal variation pattern type is selected is set to be higher than in the non-pending number reduction control state. The average time of the variable display time may be shorter than in the non-holding number reduction control state. Further, in the pending number reduction control, the variation display time itself of the variation pattern type may be shortened even when the same variation pattern type is selected, as compared with the case where the pending number reduction control state is not set.

  The variation pattern is not a two-step determination method of determining the variation pattern after determining the variation pattern type, but may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table and the big hit type determination table. FIG. 5A is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state which is not a definite change state, that is, a non-probability change state). A big hit determination table used in a normal state (at a non definite change state).

  Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 5 (A) is set as a big hit judgment value in the normal time jackpot determination table, and it is described in the right column of FIG. 5 (A) in the probability variation big hit judgment table. Each value is set as a big hit judgment value. The big hit judgment value set in the big change judgment big hit judgment table is changed to the big hit judgment value (usually called the big hit judgment value or the 1st big hit judgment value) common to the big hit judgment value set in the normal time big hit judgment table Due to the addition of the unique big hit judgment value, a large number (10 times the number) of big hit judgment values (referred to as a positive change time jackpot judgment value or a second big hit judgment value) greater than the probability change time big hit judgment table is set. . As a result, in the probability change state, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number value is as shown in FIG. If it matches with any of the shown big hit judgment values, it is decided to make it a big hit (usually a big hit or a probability variation big hit) for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 5A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit.

  FIGS. 5B and 5C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. FIG. 5 (B) is a case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension storage (also referred to as the first suspension storage) based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 13 (variation display of the first special symbol is Is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) to be used). FIG. 5C shows the case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension storage (also referred to as a second suspension storage) based on the game ball winning in the second start winning opening 14 (variation display of the second special symbol is Is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used when it is performed).

  For each of the first and second special symbol big hit classification determination tables of FIG. 5 (B) and FIG. 5 (C), when it is determined that the variation display result is a big hit design, for the big hit classification determination Based on the random number (Random 1), the type of the big hit is determined to be either "normal big hit" or "probably big hit" and is referred to determine the big hit symbol.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5B is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, and is a judgment value corresponding to each of “normal big hit” and “probable variation big hit” (big hit type determination Value) is set. The second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5C is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, and is a judgment value corresponding to each of “normal big hit” and “probable variation big hit” (big hit type determination Value) is set.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5B and 5C, the big hit classification determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit design determination value) for determining the big hit symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to "normally big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "probable variation big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "7" of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Using the jackpot classification determination table, the CPU 56 determines the classification corresponding to the jackpot classification judgment value in which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot classification, and determines the jackpot design in which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot design Do. Thereby, the big hit type and the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit type are determined at the same time.

  The first special symbol big hit classification determination table in FIG. 5B and the second special symbol big hit classification determination table in FIG. 5C have the same proportion determined as the probability variation big hit. In such a case, it is not necessary to divide the big hit classification determination table by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Also, when selecting a big hit type from among a plurality of big hit types with different maximum round numbers in the big hit gaming state as a big hit type, the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. The ratio in which the jackpot type having a large number of rounds is selected may be set to be higher than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of (B). In this way, in the high base state, the type selection of the big hit becomes advantageous to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. Also, the second special symbol big hit classification determination table of FIG. 5 (C) may have a higher probability of being determined as a probability variation big hit than the first special symbol big hit classification determination table of FIG. 5 (B) . By doing so, the variation display of the second special symbol can increase the ratio of the probability variation big hit as compared to the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, the ratio of the first special symbol jackpot classification determination table to be determined as the probability variation jackpot may be higher than that of the second special symbol jackpot classification determination table.

  Next, a variation pattern table used to select and determine variation patterns of special symbols and effect symbols in the game control microcomputer 560 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a table showing the variation pattern table used to determine the variation pattern.

  In FIG. 6, (a) shows a judgment table at the time of normal state deviation, and (b) shows a judgment table at the time of short time state. Also, (c) is a normal big hit time determination table, and (d) is a probability variable big hit time determination table. Each determination table of FIGS. 6A to 6D is stored in the ROM 54, is selected according to the game state, and is used to determine (determine) the fluctuation pattern type and the fluctuation pattern.

  The determination table shown in FIG. 6 includes a variation pattern type determination table indicating the relationship between random 2 and variation pattern types, and a variation pattern determination table indicating the relationship between random 3 and variation patterns belonging to each type for each variation pattern type. Including.

  In the column of “variation pattern type” or “variation pattern” in each table of FIG. 6, “normal” or “normal variation” indicates a normal variation pattern that is not a reach.

  Also, “normal reach” in each table in FIG. 6 indicates a variation pattern of normal reach that does not execute particularly flashy effects when reaching the reach state. "Super reach" indicates a variation pattern for performing reach effect for displaying a special effect image when reaching the reach state.

  Further, as described above, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the proportion to be selected as a big hit is high compared to “normal reach” and the reliability as a big hit is high. Furthermore, “super reach” is a change pattern in which the change time is longer (for example, normal reach 10 seconds, super reach 50 seconds to 80 seconds) compared to “normal reach”. In addition, four types of fluctuation patterns are set in the super reach, and the big hit expectation degree (big hit is achieved because the first super reach <second super reach <third super reach <fourth super reach). Indicates that the possibility is high.

  "Expected degree" is a concept including an expected degree for a big hit, an expected degree for a definite change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation for the big hit (also referred to as the degree of reliability) is the degree of expectation for the big hit (proportion of becoming the big hit) when each reach variation pattern is selected, and for example, the reach variation is performed 100 times If the jackpot hits 60 times, the expectation for the jackpot becomes 60% (the appearance rate (probability) that the jackpot appears 60%). Further, the degree of expectation for the probability change means the degree of expectation (probability change ratio) to shift to the probability change state.

  In pachinko gaming machine 1, from the start of the variable display of each of the effect pattern as identification information and the first and second special symbols until the display result is derived and displayed, predetermined effect in effect display device 9 There may be a case where an effect called a pseudo-sequence as an aspect (hereinafter, referred to as a pseudo-sequence effect) is performed. A pseudo ream is an effect display that shows what is originally a single change corresponding to one hold storage as if a plurality of changes corresponding to a plurality of hold storage are being performed continuously. It is an abbreviation showing continuous fluctuation.

  In addition, within the fluctuation time which was decided vis-a-vis the 1 start winning a prize, in order to make it appear as if the variable indication (variable display) of the plural times of the symbol was executed vis-a-vis the starting winning a prize with 1 It refers to a special variation pattern (also referred to as a variation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are performed (repeated) a predetermined number of times for all symbol rows (left, middle, right). For example, the larger the number of repetitions of re-variation (the number of total variations including the first variation and the subsequent re-variation, and also referred to as the pseudo-series variation number), the more likely it will be the jackpot reliability (big jackpot) The degree of the proportion selected when the big hit is made with respect to all the selected proportions including the time, the degree of the big hit proportion, that is, the degree of the reliability that becomes the big hit becomes high. More specifically, by increasing the ratio selected when determined to be a big hit, it is suggested by a pseudo-series effect whether it will be a big hit gaming state. In the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo ream, the pseudo reaming symbol (for example, a symbol (a numeral or the like with a predetermined character or character is not included) is not included in the rendition design that is normally fluctuated (basically fluctuated) in the effect display device 9 Symbols not attached are also referred to as "semi-continuous dedicated symbols")) temporarily stop. In addition, in pseudo ream, a production symbol (a number symbol in the present embodiment) which is usually subjected to variable display (basically variable display) may be temporarily stopped. The combination of symbols temporarily stopped in the effect display device 9 is called a combination of temporary stop symbols. The combination of temporary stop symbols is determined from any of a plurality of chances (hereinafter referred to as "simulated consecutive eyes (simulated consecutive chance eyes)" consisting of a combination of symbols other than a combination of big hit symbols) It should be done.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, there may be an effect that the effect pattern slips. Here, the term “slip” means effect display in which the symbol is slipped from the predicted stop position immediately before the stop of the symbol in the variable display. In the second super reach, then reach out (reach) by stopping after one of the two rendering symbols that had been temporarily stopped at the outset eyes (combination of the out symbols) in the left and right symbol display areas A combination of symbols is formed, and it is such an effect that reach effect is executed.

  Note that the fluctuation pattern shown in the judgment table at the time of disconnection is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of “off”. The fluctuation pattern shown in the normal jackpot determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of “normal jackpot”. The variation pattern shown in the probability variation big hit determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation indication is the display result of “probability variation big hit”.

  On the basis of these pieces of information, for example, the fluctuation pattern of “fourth super reach (80 seconds)” shown in the “fluctuation pattern” column of FIG. It is shown that it is "the fluctuation pattern of the 4th super reach performed in seconds."

  In the table of FIG. 6, the fields described as “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” have a function as a variation pattern type determination table unit indicating the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” It is a column shown. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, for each of a plurality of fluctuation pattern types such as “normal”, “normal reach” and “super reach”, all values of random 2 (1 to 251) are plural. It is divided into the numerical range of. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, if the value of random 2 extracted at a predetermined timing matches one of the judgment values allocated to 140 to 229 among the random numbers from 1 to 251, for example It is determined that “normal reach” is set as the fluctuation pattern type.

  Further, in the table of FIG. 6, the columns described as “random 3 range” and “variation pattern” indicate the function as a variation pattern determination table unit indicating the relationship between “random 3 range” and “variation pattern”. It is a column. The variation patterns indicated correspondingly to the various types of the variation pattern type determination table are the variation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking Fig. 6 (a) as an example, the variation patterns belonging to the type of "super reach" are "first super reach", "second super reach", "third super reach", and "third 4 super reach.

  All the values of random 3 (1 to 220) are divided into a plurality of numerical value ranges and allocated to each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each fluctuation pattern type. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type of "super reach" is selected, one of random numbers 1 to 220 extracted from random 3 at a predetermined timing is 1 If it matches with any numerical value of the judgment value allocated to 70, it is determined that it will be set as the fluctuation pattern of "the 1st super reach (50 seconds)."

  When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out, in order to determine the variation pattern, the determination table is selected as follows. In the non-short time state, when the fluctuation display result is out, the normal state out time determination table of FIG. 6A is selected. On the other hand, in the time saving state, when the fluctuation display result is released, the time saving state determination table of FIG. 6B is selected. Note that, by using the determination tables of FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B, the reach ratio at the time of the normal state shift and at the time shift state is fixed regardless of the number of reservations.

  When the variation display result is a big hit for the first special symbol or the second special symbol regardless of whether or not the time saving state, in order to determine the variation pattern, the determination table is selected as follows. When the variable display result is usually a big hit, the normal big hit determination table of FIG. 6C is selected. When the variation display result is a probability variation big hit regardless of whether the time saving state or not, the probability variation big hit time determination table of FIG. 6D is selected.

  In the time reduction state deviation determination table of FIG. 6B, the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation is set shorter than that of the normal state deviation determination table of FIG. 6A. 6B is shorter than the reach fluctuation (including normal reach fluctuation and super reach fluctuation) in the judgment table at the time reduction state at time shift state compared to the judgment table at the time of normal state loss in FIG. 6A. The ratio determined by normal fluctuation (non-reach is not a deviation fluctuation (a fluctuation resulting in deviation display result)) is high, and the ratio by which fluctuation time is longer than normal fluctuation is determined as a reach fluctuation is low. Data is set.

  As a result, as compared with the non-time-short state (normal state), since the ratio in which the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected is higher in the time-short state, the non-time-short state is the one in the time short state. The fluctuation display is performed with the fluctuation time shorter on average than at the time of. By selecting the determination table in this manner, the time saving state can be realized. Also, by setting the fluctuation time to be shorter in the time-shortened state than in the non-time-shortened state, it is possible to shorten the reserve digestion during the time-shortened state.

  In the judgment tables of FIG. 6 (a) and FIG. 6 (b), which are selected when they become out of place, the data is set so that the selection ratio of reach type is selected by the height relationship such that normal reach> super reach. It is done. On the other hand, in the determination tables of FIG. 6C and FIG. 6D selected when the big hit is made, the selection ratio of the reach type is selected according to the high / low relationship of the ratio such as normal reach <super reach Data is set. As a result, when reaching a big hit, the ratio at which the reach effect of the super reach is performed (the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) becomes higher than at the time of the disengagement. The presentation can increase the player's sense of expectation.

  Further, in the determination table of FIG. 6 (d) selected when the big hit is a definite variation big hit, compared to the determination table of FIG. 6 (c), which is usually selected when the big hit is a big hit, The data is set such that the rate at which the type of super reach effect is selected is high. As a result, the ratio at which the reach effect of the super reach is performed (the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach at the time the reach is selected) becomes higher when the probability change big hit becomes, compared to the time when the big hit normally occurs. The reach effect of the reach can be performed to increase the player's expectation for the probability variation big hit.

  In addition, such fluctuation pattern, when the sum total reservation memory number (total value) of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol to display variable is more than predetermined number (for example, the total number of reservation memory is 3 or more) By setting the selection ratio to be different when it is less than the predetermined number, when the total number of pending storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the total number of pending storages is less than the predetermined number. It is also possible to execute the pending number shortening control in which However, even under conditions where the number-of-holds reduction control is executed (for example, the total number of held memories is 3 or more), the sense of reach can be maintained by making the ratio of reach (including normal reach and super reach) constant. In addition, among the reach, only the super reach may not be shortened, and the on-hold time reduction control may be performed. Furthermore, the pending number time reduction control may be executable by selecting the fluctuation time as a short percentage of normal fluctuation with a short fluctuation time, or may be performed by shortening the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern itself, The combination may be sufficient.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. In the game control microcomputer 560, as shown in FIG. 7, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the game control state.

  Main commands in FIG. 7 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is a production control command (variation pattern command) for specifying a variation pattern of the production design that is variably displayed on the presentation display 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns which can be used as shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect symbol.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result specification commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type.

  The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (design confirmation designation command) for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

  The command A 001 to A 002 (H) is a jackpot start designation command for designating a jackpot game state start for each jackpot type (usually a jackpot or a probability variation jackpot).

  The command A1XX (H) is a large winning opening open designation command indicating a display of the number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening a big winning opening, which indicates after opening (closing) a special winning opening of the number (round) indicated by XX.

  The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating a jackpot gaming state end for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  Command A 401 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there has been a first start prize. The command A 402 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there has been a second start prize.

  The command B 000 (H) is a normal state designation command which designates that the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state). The command B 001 (H) is a time saving state designating command specifying that the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state). The command B 002 (H) is a definite change state designation command which specifies that the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability state).

  The command C0XX (H) is a first pending storage number specification command for specifying the first pending storage number. "XX" in the command C0XX (H) indicates the first pending storage number. The command C1XX (H) is a second pending storage number designation command for specifying the second pending storage number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the second pending storage number.

  In the microcomputer 100 for effect control, the first pending storage number designation command for indicating the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number designation command for indicating the second pending storage number are transmitted. Although it is possible to specify the number of pending storages, the present invention is not limited to this, but whenever the variable display is performed, a pending storage number subtraction specification command for subtracting the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number is transmitted. Thus, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the number of pending storages may be specified.

  The command C2XX (H) and the command C3 XX (H) are the winning determination results of the big hit determination, big hit type determination, fluctuation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 It is an effect control command indicating the content. Among these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not to be a big hit among the winning determination results, and a determination result of the type of the big hit. Further, command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating the determination result (determination result of variation pattern type) of which determination value range the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is among the winning determination results. It is.

  In this embodiment, in the prize-time effect processing (see S1217 and S1228 in FIG. 11), the microcomputer 560 for game control determines whether or not it will be a big hit at the start winning, the type of big hit, and the variation pattern type determination random number. It is determined whether the value is in the range of which determination value. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating a type of a big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. A value designating the range of the determination value as the determination result of the variation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the variation type command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or not, and the type of the big hit at the start winning, based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and changes. The variation pattern type can be recognized based on the type command.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of the hold storage buffer in the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of the pending storage specific information storage area (pending specific area). The reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55 (which is an area in the RAM 55), and as shown in FIG. 8A, the maximum value of the value of the total reserved memory number counter which counts the total reserved memory number (8 in this example) An area corresponding to) is secured. FIG. 8A shows an example where the value of the total pending storage number counter is five.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (A), in the hold specific area, it is "first" or "second" in the order of winning based on the winning on the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. The data shown is set. Therefore, data that can specify the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 is stored in the hold specific area. The hold specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  FIG. 8B is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a storage area (pending storage buffer) for saving random numbers and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 8B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first number of pending storages is secured in the first pending storage buffer. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. The first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. In the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer, a big hit determination random number (random R) which is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) which is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination random number (Random 2) and a variation pattern determination random number (Random 3) are stored.

  The CPU 56 extracts such random number values from the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating the software random number based on the winning on the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14, and (1) A process of saving (storing) in the save area of the pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer is executed. Specifically, these random number values are extracted based on the winning of the first start winning opening 13 and are stored in the first hold storage buffer. Also, based on the winning on the second start winning opening 14, these random number values are extracted and stored in the second hold storage buffer.

  As described above, it may be indicated as "stored on hold" that the information on the start winning combination as described above is stored in the first held storage buffer or the second held storage buffer. The random number for fluctuation pattern type determination (random 2) and the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) are not extracted at the start winning combination and stored in advance in the storage area, but will be described later for fluctuation pattern setting processing ( It may be extracted at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol).

  The data stored in the reserved specific area and the storage area in this manner is read out at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display. It should be noted that the data stored in the reserved specific area and the storage area are read out at the start winning game, and before starting the variable display to be notified of the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit" etc., special symbol It may be used for the advance notice effect that can be executed based on the hold information etc. of the variable display of.

  When there is a start winning on the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, commands such as a symbol specifying command, a variation type command, and a total holding number of memories specifying command are sent from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. Will be sent. In the start winning winning time reception command buffer provided in the RAM 103 of the effect control microcomputer 100, various commands such as the received symbol specification command, variation type command, total hold storage number specification command, etc. can be stored in association with each other. A storage area for storing data that can specify the received command is secured.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect pattern performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to a plurality of types of change patterns, and the variation display operation of the effect symbol, reach effect And the like, or data indicating the control content of various rendering operations such as various rendering operations without accompanying display of variation of the rendering pattern. Further, the notice effect control pattern is composed of data etc. indicating the control content of the effect operation to be the notice effect to be executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control content.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main substrate 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically taken for a predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is executed. As a result, various game control can be performed.

  In the main processing, for example, necessary initialization processing, initialization processing at normal time, gaming state recovery processing at times other than normal, random number circuit setting processing (initial setting of random number circuit 503), random number update processing for display (variation pattern The determination of the type of the object, the update process of various random numbers such as the change pattern determination), and the update process of the initial value random number (update process of the initial value of the count value of the random number generation counter for determination per symbol).

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes timer interrupt processing of steps S (hereinafter simply referred to as "S") 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (S20). Next, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input through the input driver circuit 58, and the state of them is determined (switching process: S21) .

  Next, the CPU 56 displays the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol hold memory indicator 18a, the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b, the ordinary symbol A display control process is performed to control display of the hold storage indicator 41 (S22). With regard to the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the normal symbol display 10, control is performed to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Run.

  In addition, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating random numbers for determination such as a random number per determination for a regular symbol and a random number for big hit classification determination used for game control (random number update processing for determination: S23) . The CPU 56 further performs processing for updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (S26). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening in a predetermined order, and the special symbol process is performed. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding processing according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order, and changes the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state Update accordingly.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer, for example (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a winning ball process for setting the number of winning balls based on the detection signals of the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a and the count switch 23 (S30).

  In the present embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 is configured to turn on / off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. Are output to the output port (S31: output processing).

  The CPU 56 also performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S32).

  Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( S33). Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (S34), and the process ends. By the above control, in the present embodiment, the game control process is activated every predetermined time.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, start opening switch passage processing is executed (S312). Then, depending on the internal state, one of the processes in S300 to S307 is performed.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the RAM 55 stores, as described above, pending storage data (first pending storage data) such as a jackpot determination random number obtained based on the starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13. A second holding storage buffer for storing holding storage data (second holding storage data) such as a jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start winning for the second start winning opening 14; Is provided. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the number of storages of each pending storage is secured in each of these pending storage buffers.

  In the starting opening switch passing process, if the first starting opening switch 13a is turned on, the number of first holding storage data stored under the condition that the first number of holding storages has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the first reserved memory number counter that counts the number is incremented by 1, and numerical data from the random number circuit 503 or the counter for generating software random numbers (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination Processing for extracting (random numbers) and storing them in the storage area of the first pending storage buffer. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 14a is turned on, the number of second pending storage data is counted on condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the pending storage number counter is increased by 1, and numeric data (for example, a random number for big hit determination, a random number for variation pattern type determination, and a random number for variation pattern determination) are extracted from the random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating software random numbers. And store them in the storage area of the second pending storage buffer.

  With regard to the following description regarding pending storage, it may be indicated as "pending on storage" that information regarding the start winning combination as described above is stored in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer. Also, numerical data stored in the first storage buffer may be referred to as first storage data, and numerical data stored in the second storage buffer may be referred to as second storage data.

  The processes of S300 to S307 are the following processes. The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and determining the big hit type in the case of a big hit. The variation pattern setting process (S301) counts the variation time according to the determination of the variation pattern (determination of the variation pattern type determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number) and the determined variation pattern Is a process for controlling the start of counting of the fluctuation time timer.

  The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process for performing control of transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The special symbol variation processing (S303) is processing for advancing the process to the special symbol stop processing when the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting processing has elapsed. Special symbol stop processing (S304), when the lapse of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is counted by the fluctuation time timer, the fluctuation display in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b A process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

  The special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) is processing for performing control to open the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 20 according to the type of the big hit. In the big winning opening open process (S306), control to transmit the production control command for round display production in the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, and confirms the establishment of the closing condition of the big winning opening It is a process which performs a process etc. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305). In addition, when all the rounds are finished, it moves to the big hit end processing (S307). The big hit end process (S307) is a process for performing control or the like to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of S312. In the starting opening switch passage process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the first starting opening switch 13a is in the on state (S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the on state, the process proceeds to S1222. If the first start port switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the first number of pending storages has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first pending storage for counting the first number of pending storages) Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is checked (S1212). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to S1222.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (S1213) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number 1 is increased (S1214). In addition, the CPU 56 holds the combined hold storage in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 described in FIG. 8. Data indicating "first" is set in the area corresponding to the value of the number counter (S1215).

  In the present embodiment, when the first starting opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when the gaming ball starts starting winning in the first starting winning opening 13), data indicating "first" is set, When the 2 start opening switch 14a is turned on (that is, when the game ball is started start winning combination in the second start winning opening 14), the data indicating "second" is set. For example, CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data representing “first” when first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the pending storage specific information storage area (pending specific area) shown in FIG. 8. When the second start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating "second". In this case, when there is no corresponding pending storage, 00 (H) is set in the pending storage specific information storage area (pending specific area).

  As shown in FIG. 8A, in the hold specific area, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the combined hold memory number counter is secured, and the first start winning opening 13 or Data indicating “first” or “second” in the order of winning based on the winning on the second start winning opening 14 is set. Therefore, in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 is stored.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes processing for extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 8B) (see FIG. S1216). In the process of S1216, a jackpot determination random number (random R), a jackpot type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted, It is stored in the save area.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect rendering process in which the fluctuation display result and fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed is determined at the time of starting winning (S1217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (S1218), and transmits the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (S1219). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S 1220), sets the value of the total holding memory number counter to the EXT data, and sets the total holding memory number specifying command. Control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S1221).

  By executing the processing of S1218 and S1219, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, gaming state such as big hit gaming state), the first start Every time the winning opening 13 starts and wins, both the symbol designating command and the variation type command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the start winning prize for the first start winning opening 13 is generated by executing the processing of S1218 to S1221, the symbol designating command, the variation type command, the first start prize designating command, and A set of four commands of the total number of pending storage specification commands is transmitted in batch in one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether the second start port switch 14a is in the on state (S1222). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the on state, the process ends. If the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the second number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending storage for counting the second number of pending storages) Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is checked (S1223). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (S1224) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number 1 increase (S1225). In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in the area corresponding to the value of the total suspension storage number counter in the suspension storage specific information storage area (preservation specific area) (S1226).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes processing for extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 8B) (see FIG. S1227). In the process of S1227, the jackpot determination random number (random R), the jackpot type determination random number (random 1), the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted Stored in the save area.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a prize effect process (S1228). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (S1229), and controls to transmit the variation type command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control (S1230). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1231), sets the value of the total holding memory number counter to the EXT data, and sets the total holding memory number specifying command. Control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S1232).

  By executing the processing of S1229 and S1230, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (the gaming state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, big hit gaming state, etc.), the second start Every time a start-up winning is made to the winning opening 14, both of the symbol designation command and the variation type command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the start winning prize for the second start winning opening 14 is generated by executing the processing of S1229 to S1232, a symbol designating command, a variation type command, a second start prize designating command, and A set of four commands of the total number of pending storage specification commands is transmitted in batch in one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing (S300) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (S51). If there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, the customer wait state designation command specifying the customer wait state mode is executed if the customer wait state designation command has not been transmitted yet. A process for transmission is performed (S77), and the special symbol normal processing is ended. Here, when the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting state designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting state designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after transmitting the customer waiting state specifying command, the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted flag is repeatedly set based on the flag, and the customer is repeated. It is controlled so as not to send a wait state designation command. Such a customer waiting state designation command transmitted flag is reset when the next time the variable display of the special symbol is started.

  When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the CPU 56 selects the first data of the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 8A) as the “first”. It is confirmed whether or not it is data indicating (S52). If the first data set in the hold specific area is not data indicating "first" (ie, data indicating "second") (N in S52), the CPU 56 selects the special symbol pointer (first Data indicating "second" is set to a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the special symbol or the second special symbol is processed (S53). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "first" (Y in S52), the CPU 56 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (S54).

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol of the first special symbol display 8a is selected depending on whether data indicating the "first" is set to the special symbol pointer or data indicating the "second" is set. The variable display and the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b are executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol display is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer. Be On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the second special symbol variation display on the second special symbol display 8b based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer Is done.

  By executing the processing of S52 to S54, in the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol or the first special symbol in the order of the winning combination in which the gaming balls have won in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 The variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages of 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55, and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. Are stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second holding storage number = 1 in the second holding storage buffer. It is stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the pending storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and for each saving area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift the content. If the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the respective save areas in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 55 The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1. In addition, the CPU 56 sums up the values (the value indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of reserved storages = m (m = 2 to 8) in the suspension specific area. It stores in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages = m-1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4. Further, the order in which the respective values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1 to 8.

  The count value of the total pending storage number counter formed in the RAM 55 and counting the combined pending storage number is decremented by 1 (S57). Note that the CPU 56 stores the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating the "first" indicating that the processing is performed targeting the first start winning opening 13; that is, the processing indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol Data indicating "" or data indicating "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is, "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the processing of S300 to S307 can be made common to the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random R (big hit determination random number) from the hold storage buffer and executes the big hit determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in S1216 of the starting opening switch passing processing and S1227 of the starting opening switch passing processing and stored in advance in the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer. Do. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 5) with a jackpot determination random number and determining that a jackpot will occur if they match. That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination.

  In the process of the big hit determination, when the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than in the non-probable change state (normal game state). Specifically, the probability variation time jackpot determination table (the table on the right side of FIG. 5A in the ROM 54 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are probability variation A normal-time big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 5A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set smaller than the time big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a definite variation state, and when the gaming state is a definite variation state, the big variation determination processing is performed using the large variation determination table at the positive variation, and the gaming state is normally free When it is in the state or the time saving state, processing of the big hit determination is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 5A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a big hit (Y in S61), the process proceeds to S71. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  It is to be noted that the confirmation as to whether or not the current gaming state is a definite change state is made based on whether or not the positive change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability change state, and is reset when ending the probability change state. Specifically, the probability change flag is set in the big hit end process (S307 in FIG. 10) when the probability change big hit occurs, and then, the condition that the next big hit is determined or the fluctuation display that results in the out of display When the condition is satisfied that the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) has been executed, it is reset at the timing of ending the fluctuation display of the special symbol and displaying the stop symbol.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in S61), the process proceeds to S75 described later.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches one of the jackpot determination values in S61, the CPU 56 sets a jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is a jackpot (S71). The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type to any one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type of FIG. 5 (C) One of the tables for determination is selected (S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the first special symbol big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 5 (B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates the "second", the CPU 56 selects the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 5 (C).

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot type determination random number extracted in the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and holds using the jackpot type judgment table selected in S72. A big hit type and a big hit symbol corresponding to a value matching the value of the random number (random 1) for big hit type determination stored in the storage buffer are determined (S73).

  As shown in FIGS. 5 (B) and 5 (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the big hit type and the big hit symbol is set so that the big hit symbol differs for each big hit type, Since the big hit type and the big hit symbol are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the big hit symbol and the game control according to the big hit type is simplified, so that it is possible to prevent the game control from becoming complicated.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type to the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S74). For example, when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “01” is set as the big hit type data. When the big hit type is “probable variation big hit”, “02” is set as the big hit type data.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (S75). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, the symbol "-" which is an out symbol is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. If the big hit flag is set, the big hit symbol determined in S73 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be "probable variation big hit", "7" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "normal jackpot", "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S76).

  In the display result designation command transmission process (S302) described above, any one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 3 designation command for designating the display result according to the type of the jackpot determined or the CPU 56 determines the hit. Control to transmit the effect control command (see FIG. 7) is performed.

  In the special symbol variation process (S303) described above, the CPU 56 decrements the variation time timer by 1, and when the variation time timer times out, the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop process (S304) Update to a value and proceed to special symbol stop processing.

  As a result of the variable display, when it becomes a big hit, the big winning opening opening pre-processing (S305), the big winning opening open processing (S306), and the big hitting end processing (S307) is executed, control to the big hit gaming state Be done. In the big hit end process (S307), at the end of the definite variation big hit, the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set, and when the big hit is ended normally, the time saving flag is set. By this, after the end of the probability variation big hit, it is controlled to the probability variation state and the short time status, and after the end of the big hit normally, it is controlled to the time short status.

  It is necessary to continue the time-varying state of the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit until either the variable display is executed 100 times or the next big hit occurs. The duration of such fluctuation display 100 times, in the big hit end processing (S307), the time reduction number counter showing the number of times the special symbol can be fluctuated in the time saving state is set to 100 times, and thereafter the fluctuation display is executed The special symbol stop process is controlled by performing subtraction and updating, and the time saving flag is reset based on the count-up of the time saving counter, and control to end the time saving state is performed.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing effect control main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80.

  When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main processing. In the effect control main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control (S701) ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the effect control main process, when the timer interruption flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703), and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets data such as a flag that can specify what the received effect control command indicates. Processing (for example, processing for storing data capable of specifying the received command in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 103) is performed (command analysis processing: S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process, in order to perform various effects such as fluctuation display of the effect design on the effect display device 9 according to the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S704, the current control of each process according to the control state The process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute effect control.

  Next, random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 100 (SR1-1 for determining the left stop symbol for the production symbol, SR1-2 for determining the middle symbol for the production symbol, SR1-3 for determining the right stop symbol for the production symbol The random number updating process is performed to update the count value of the counter for generating various random numbers (including various random numbers) (S706). Each of such random numbers is generated by counting of a random counter that updates the count value by software, and is cyclically updated within a predetermined range for each, and extracted at the timing determined for each Is used as a random number.

  Next, a hold storage display control process is performed to control the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (move, delete, etc. of the hold display) (S707).

  Subsequently, lower dish error detection processing (S 708) for detecting that a predetermined number of gaming balls are stored in the lower tray 4, the player operates the volume / light quantity change button 50, the push button 120, the trigger button 125 and the like Is executed, and the player setting process (S709) for changing the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 and the light amount of the light output from the frame LED is executed.

  By such effect control main processing being executed, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the effect display device 9, various LEDs, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted and received from the game control microcomputer 560. By controlling the rendering devices such as the speakers 27L and 27R, various types of rendering control according to the gaming state are performed.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a winning sound based on the occurrence of the start winning event (S498), and displays the hold indication H and the active indication AH with the hold indication H and the active indication AH. After performing the hold display effect process (S499) for rotating display (animation display) at the position (S499), determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and the pre-reading effect process (S500) for selecting the type of pre-reading effect One of the processes in S800 to S807 is performed according to the value of the effect control process flag.

  In the effect control process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process processing, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and the variable display of the effect symbol is realized, but the control regarding the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second special symbol The control regarding the fluctuation display of the production design synchronized with the fluctuation of is also executed in one production control process process.

  The winning sound output process (S 498) is a process for outputting a winning sound based on the occurrence of the start winning as described above, and the hold display effect process (S 499) is the hold display H and the active display AH as described above. It is processing for rotating and displaying (animation display) at the display positions of the pending display H and the active display AH.

  The pre-reading effect process (S500) is a process for performing pre-reading determination such as whether or not pre-reading effect is to be executed, and determining an effect mode when performing pre-reading effect. With pre-reading effect, before the order of the fluctuation display (pattern fluctuation) of the special symbol based on certain holding information (holding memory information) arrives, the holding information is prefetched and the special symbol fluctuation based on the holding information It is rendering technology such as giving notice at a stage prior to the determination of the content of the display and what will be the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the future. For example, when the hold information is a big hit, it is possible that a big hit may occur later based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information before the variable display by the hold information is executed. An effect such as giving notice is performed as a pre-reading effect. Hereinafter, the variable display based on the hold information targeted for the pre-reading effect will be referred to as “target variable display”.

  The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) is a process for performing a process of confirming whether or not the variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. If the variation pattern command has been received, the process shifts to rendering symbol variation start processing.

  The effect symbol variation start process (S801) is a process for controlling to start the change display of the effect symbol (decorative pattern). The effect symbol variation process (S802) is a process for controlling the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern. The effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S803) is a process for stopping the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (decoration pattern) and performing control for deriving and displaying the display result of the fluctuation display (final stop symbol).

  The big hit display process (S804) is a process for performing display control such as control for displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the occurrence of a big hit on the effect display device 9 after the fluctuation time ends. The in-round process (S805) is a process of performing display control in the round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the process proceeds to the round post-processing, and if the final round is ended, the process proceeds to the big hit end processing. The post-round process (S806) is a process of performing display control between rounds. When the round start condition is satisfied, the processing shifts to the processing during the round. The jackpot end effect processing (S 807) is processing for performing display control to notify the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended in the effect display device 9.

  The effect control CPU 101 is a process stored in the ROM 102 during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop of the fluctuation display and from the start of the big hit gaming state to the end of the big hit gaming state. Control of the rendering device (component for rendering) such as the rendering display device 9 is performed according to the process data set in the table.

  The process table is configured of process timer set values and data in which a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, LED control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. is described which indicates the aspect of each variation constituting the variation aspect during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the rendering symbol (decor pattern). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a winning sound output process in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the winning sound output process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether a winning sound outputting flag indicating that a winning sound is being output is set (S1002). If the winning sound output flag is set (S1002; Y), the processing proceeds to S1008, and if the winning sound output flag is not set (S1002; N), the first start winning opening designation command reception flag or 2) It is determined whether or not the 2 start winning opening winning selection command reception flag is set, that is, whether the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (S1003). When the first start winning opening designation command reception flag or the second start winning opening winning selection command reception flag is set (S1003; Y), the effect control CPU 101 sets a winning sound output flag (S1004), A process table for winning sound output is selected (S1005). Then, the winning sound output process timer in the winning sound output process data 1 of the selected winning sound output process table is started (S1006).

  In the winning sound output process table, sound control execution data and the like for controlling the sound output from the speaker 27 correspond to each of the winning sound output process data n (from 1 to N) in time series. Are arranged in order.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a winning sound from the speaker 27 according to the content (sound control execution data 1) of the process data for winning sound output, and ends the winning sound output process (S1007). For example, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to cause sound output from the speaker 27. When the first start winning opening designation command reception flag and the second start winning opening winning selection command reception flag are not set (S1003; N), the CPU 101 for effect control does not execute S1004 to S1007, and the winning sound is not generated. End output processing.

  In S1008, the CPU for effect control 101 decrements the value of the winning sound output process timer by 1, and determines whether the winning sound output process timer has timed out (S1009). When the winning process output process timer has not timed out (S1009; N), according to the contents of the process data for winning sound output corresponding to the process sound output for winning sound, the winning sound is output from the speaker 27 and obtained sound output If the process ends (S1010) and the process sound output for winning sound is out (S1009; Y), it is determined whether or not the process sound output for winning sound that was timed out is the last process sound output for winning sound It is determined (S1011).

  If the winning process sound output process timer is not the last process sound output process timer (S1011; N), the process data for winning sound output is switched (S1012), the next process sound output process winning sound The start is made (S1013). Then, according to the contents of the process data for winning sound output corresponding to the next process sound output for winning sound, the winning sound is outputted from the speaker 27 and the winning sound output process is ended (S1013). When the winning process output for winning sound output is the last process timer for winning sound output (S1011; Y), the winning sound output flag is cleared and the winning sound output process is ended (S1014).

  As shown in FIG. 40 (A) to FIG. 40 (C), in the present embodiment, whether the variable display is being performed or not, the deceleration during the variable display is performed by executing the winning sound output processing as described above. Regardless of whether or not the control is being executed, a series of winning sounds are output over a period T6 based on the occurrence of the start winning. That is, in the present embodiment, the output of the winning sound is performed from the speaker 27 at the same speed regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is performed during the variable display.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the on-hold display effect process in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the on-hold display effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first refers to the on-hold storage specification information storage area and the like to specify the total on-hold storage number (S1021). Then, it is determined whether the total pending storage number specified in S1021 matches the pending display number currently displayed in the pending storage display unit (S1022). If the total number of pending storages specified in S1021 does not match the currently displayed pending display number (S1022; N), the process table for pending display effect according to the total number of pending storages specified in S1021 is selected (S1023) ), The process timer for suspension display effect in the process data 1 for suspension display effect of the selected suspension display effect process table is started (S1024).

  Incidentally, in the process table for suspension display effect, effect display control data etc. for rotating and displaying each suspension display H and active display AH on the vertical axis in the effect display device 9 are process data n for each suspension display effect ( (1) to (N) are sequentially arranged in chronological order.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect display of each hold display H and active display AH on the effect display device 9 according to the process data 1 for hold display effect (effect display control data 1) (vertical of each hold display H and active display AH The rotation display about the axis is executed, and the on-hold display effect process is ended (S1025).

  If the total pending storage number specified in S1021 matches the currently displayed pending display number (S1022; Y), it is determined whether the total pending storage number is 0 (S1026). If the total reserve storage number is 0 (S1026; Y), it is further determined whether or not variable display is in progress (S1027). In addition, whether the value of the effect control process flag to be described later is a value according to any of the effect pattern change start process, the effect pattern change processing, and the effect pattern change stop process whether or not the change display is in progress It is sufficient to determine If the total number of pending storages is not 0 (S1026; N) or if the variable display is in progress (S1027; Y), the value of the pending display effect process timer is decremented by 1 (S1028), and the pending display effect process timer It is determined whether the timer has timed out (S1029).

  When the pending display effect process timer has not timed out (S1029; N), each pending display H and active display on the effect display device 9 according to the contents of the pending display effect process data corresponding to the pending display effect process timer The effect display of AH is executed, and the on-hold display effect process is ended (S1030). When the pending display effect process timer has timed out (S1029; Y), it is determined whether it is the last pending display effect process timer that has timed out (S1032). If it is the last hold display effect process timer (S1032; Y), the processing of S1024 and S1025 is executed to repeatedly execute the effect display of each hold display H and the active display AH. If it is not the last hold display effect process timer (S1032; N), the effect control CPU 101 switches the hold display effect process data (S1033), and the next hold display effect process The timer is started (S1034). And according to the contents of the process data for suspension display effect corresponding to the process timer for the next suspension display effect, the effect display of each suspension display H and active display AH in the effect display device 9 is executed, and the suspension display effect process is ended ( S1035).

  By executing the on-hold display effect processing as described above, as shown in FIG. 17A, while the on-hold display H and the active display AH in the present embodiment are displayed on the effect display device 9, The display is rotated about a vertical axis at a constant speed (speed V1 in this embodiment).

  Here, the hold display H and the active display AH will be briefly described. As already described, the hold storage display unit (total hold) which displays the total number of the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number (total hold memory number) at the lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 9 A storage display unit, a hold display area) is provided. When the variable display of the effect design is started, the hold display H (the hold display displayed on the leftmost side on the screen) displayed since the oldest is erased. The remaining hold indication H is shifted to the left one by one. An active display area AHA displaying an active image (active display AH) showing a fluctuation-responsive display corresponding to the variable display during execution of the variable display corresponding to the erased (moved, shifted) hold display H Displayed at the bottom left of the screen. In the active display area AHA, the hold display H erased with the start of the variable display corresponds to the hold display H displayed so far, for example, moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA The active display AH is displayed in a manner that can be identified. Active display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of effect display device 9.

  The specific effect performed in the present embodiment will be described. The specific effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the predetermined display corresponding to the variable display. The predetermined display corresponding to the variable display is, for example, the hold display H or the active display AH. Therefore, the specific effect is, for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display H or the active display AH. By changing the display mode of the hold indication H or the active indication AH, it is suggested that the hold indication H or the active indication AH is advantageous by the player. The advantage for the player is, for example, that the result of the variable display corresponding to the hold display H or the active display AH is a big hit, and the other variable display of the hold display H or the active display AH is the expectation of the big hit It is to be high reach.

  In the variable display in which the specific effect is executed, the display area of the variable display may be reduced during the specific effect so that the specific effect does not overlap with various effects performed in the variable display. Further, the display area of the screen may be divided to distinguish the area in which the effect relating to the variable display is performed and the area in which the specific effect is performed. In addition, another image display device may be provided, and the specific effect may be performed in the display area. In addition, an action display may be completed to prompt operation of a predetermined operation means by an action display acting on the predetermined display such that a ball, a sword or an arrow collides with or pierces the predetermined display.

  The specific example of the specific effect which changes the display mode of the pending | holding display H is shown in FIG. Moreover, the specific example of the specific effect which changes the display mode of the active display AH is shown in each of FIG. 24, FIG. 41, and FIG. First, a specific example of the specific effect of changing the display mode of the hold display H will be described.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the on-hold change effect. The on-hold change effect is an example of the specific effect on the on-hold display H. In addition, since the pending change effect is an effect of giving notice of an operation related to the variable display corresponding to the pending display by changing the aspect of the pending display H (the pending display TH shown in FIG. 17) to be a target, the pre-reading effect It is positioned as one of

  Whether the color of the hold display TH of the object changes by the color ball thrown away toward one of the hold display H hitting the target hold display TH and being split introduced here. It is a production that shows The setting here is based on the premise that the color ball must always hit the target hold indication TH, and the player is entertained with an effect of whether or not the ball is broken. Of course, it may be set so that an effect may be generated such that the thrown ball does not collide with the target hold indication TH. If the ball is finely broken and the color of the hold indication TH changes, the rendering result is successful, and if the color of the hold indication TH does not change without breaking the ball, it is a failure. When it succeeds, the degree of expectation that the pending display TH is a big hit is higher than when it fails (see FIG. 19). It is also referred to as “updating” that the color of the hold display TH changes to a color with high expectation such as a big hit.

  The on-hold change effect of this embodiment is characterized in that the speed of the color ball thrown off toward one of the on-hold indications H is decelerated halfway. In particular, the length of the decelerating period is not uniform, and is determined from at least two types, and it is more likely that the rendering result will be successful if the decelerating period is longer than if the decelerating period is short (see FIG. 20). ). However, regardless of which deceleration period is selected, the timing at which the ball starts to decelerate after being thrown is common.

  The effect will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. Various images are displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 while the variation display of the effect pattern indicated by the three downward arrows is performed. At the lower end portion, a hold display TH or hold display H for displaying the generated hold storage information is displayed corresponding to the number of the hold storage information (hereinafter referred to as a hold storage image or a hold display). In these pending displays H, the pending storage image may be displayed in a form in which the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number are distinguished. At the lower left of the screen, an active display area AHA is displayed. An active display AH is displayed above the active display area AHA.

  Referring to FIG. 17A, a character 930 having a color ball 931 appears during the variable display of the effect pattern. The appearance timing of the character 930 can be set variously. However, it is necessary to prevent the holding display from being wasted by shifting the hold display during the effect period between the appearance of the character 930 and the outcome of success or failure of the effect. Therefore, the character 930 is made to appear at a stage where the remaining period of the variable display is sufficiently longer than the rendering period.

  The character 930 throws the color ball 931 toward the second hold display TH from the left of the four hold displays appearing on the screen. The time from when the character 930 throws the color ball 931 until the color ball 931 encounters the hold indication TH is a predetermined period. The length of the predetermined period is different depending on whether the effect is successful or not, but may be the same. In any case, the speed of the color ball 931 changes in the predetermined period.

  The color ball 931 moves at a constant speed for a certain period of time after it has been thrown (until it moves a predetermined distance), but the speed is reduced when the certain period has elapsed. That is, the deceleration period is entered. The situation is shown in FIG. 17 (b). The effect of such deceleration control is, for example, an effect of slow motion reproduction. The deceleration period is 3 seconds or 5 seconds. However, regardless of which deceleration period is set, the period from when the character 930 throws the ball until it enters the deceleration period is common. After the deceleration period by such slow motion reproduction, the speed of the color ball 931 returns to the initial speed again, and the color ball 931 eventually collides with the target hold indication TH. Note that the effect may be ended while the vehicle is decelerating without returning to the initial velocity, or the velocity after the end of the deceleration period may be different from the velocity in the initial velocity or the deceleration period. In the on-hold change effect shown in FIG. 17, the sound output from the speaker 27 as the on-hold change effect has an output speed (reproduction speed) from the speaker 27 at the time of executing the deceleration control than at the non-execution of the deceleration control. descend. That is, the sound outputted from the speaker 27 as a part of the on-hold change effect differs in mode between execution time of the deceleration control and non-execution time.

  As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 (b), each hold indication H and active indication AH during the deceleration period (during the execution of the deceleration control) have a constant speed around the vertical axis as a hold indication effect In the example, it is rotated and displayed at the velocity V1). In other words, the pending display H and the active display AH in the present embodiment are pending display because the speed at which the display is rotated about the vertical axis as the pending display effect is unchanged regardless of whether or not the deceleration period is underway. The player is prevented from being mistakenly recognized that the H and the active display AH are the display under deceleration control. Further, in the present embodiment, the hold display H is displayed (increased display) in the hold display area based on the speed at which the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA based on the occurrence of the start winning or the occurrence of the start winning. Speed is also unchanged regardless of whether it is in the deceleration period or not.

  After that, the pattern of the effect is a successful pattern in which the color ball 931 which has collided is broken and the paint in the middle covers the target retention indication TH, and the color of the retention indication becomes a different color from the initial color. It bounces without breaking, and it divides into a failure pattern in which the color of the hold display TH does not change. FIG. 17C shows a success pattern, and FIG. 17D shows a failure pattern. In the case of the success pattern, the push button 120 vibrates before the color ball 931 breaks, and the player is notified of the success pattern (button notification effect). This can improve the player's sense of expectation. Of course, the push button 120 may or may not vibrate. Note that such advance notice may be performed by voice or image instead of or in addition to the push button 120. Also, the button notification effect may be determined by lottery. In such a case, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation be higher in the case where the push button 120 vibrates than in the case where the push button 120 does not vibrate. Further, the vibration of the push button 120 may be provided with strength. In such a case, a lottery including the strength of the push button 120 may be performed at the time of the lottery of the button notification effect. Then, the jackpot expectation may be higher in the case where the push button 120 vibrates stronger than in the case where the push button 120 vibrates weakly.

  In the success pattern, the color of the hold display changes from the original color to one of a plurality of colors. For example, the variations of the color are blue, green and red. Such a color difference represents, for example, a difference in the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the pending display will be a big hit. For example, red has the highest jackpot expectation, followed by green and then blue. The player can provide a more entertaining game because it can focus on which color changes in the success pattern. In order to further increase the expectation for the change in color, the movement of the ball may be temporarily stopped at the stage where the color ball 931 collides with the hold indication TH or just before the collision.

  As described above, according to the on-hold change effect described above, since there is a period in which the speed of the color ball 931 is decelerated before the color ball 931 is released and before it collides with the on-hold indication TH. Expectations can be raised. In particular, the player's sense of expectation is significantly improved as compared with the effect of causing the pending display TH to collide with the color ball 931 at the same speed without decelerating the speed of the color ball 931. Further, since the deceleration period is selectively set from a plurality of items, it is possible to provide a variety of effects while making the player pay attention to the deceleration period.

  During execution of the pending change effect in the present embodiment, the pending indication H and the active indication AH have a constant speed (the velocity V1 in the present embodiment) regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is being executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation speed of the hold display TH or the active display AH, which is the target of the hold change effect, is different from the rotation speed of the other hold display H. As a result, the player may easily recognize which one of the on-hold display H and the on-hold display H is the target of the on-hold change effect.

  Also, although the hold indication H and the active indication AH in the present embodiment are rotated and displayed at a constant speed around the vertical axis regardless of the display mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and these hold The display H and the active display AH may have different operation modes such as the rotation speed and the rotation direction according to the display mode.

  In this embodiment, after the deceleration period ends and the speed of the color ball 931 returns to the initial speed, the color ball 931 collides with the target hold indication TH or the active indication AH to hold the target hold indication TH or the active indication. Although the form which the display mode of display AH changes is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, The button operation promotion image which urges operation of the push button 120 during the deceleration period is displayed on the effect display apparatus 9 The display mode of the target hold display TH or the active display AH may be changed by displaying and accepting the operation of the push button 120 while the button operation promotion image is being displayed. As described above, when the button operation promotion image is displayed during the deceleration period, an image showing a state in which the push button 120 is not operated and an image showing a state in which the push button 120 is operated are repeated as the button operation promotion image. May be displayed. In addition, while the button operation promotion image is being displayed during the deceleration period, the remaining button reception period meter showing the remaining reception period of the operation of the push button 120 is displayed together with the button operation promotion image. The user may be able to recognize the remaining reception period of the operation of the push button 120.

  Moreover, although the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the holding change effect can be executed during the variable display, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display, the variable display result is a big hit and It may be possible to perform an advance notice effect during fluctuation which suggests that the In addition, as such an advance notice effect during change, when the player operates the push button 120, a button operation effect of displaying a predetermined image on the effect display device 9 may be executable.

  Furthermore, if button operation effects can be executed as a preview effect during fluctuation, the button operation promoting image and the remaining reception period meter may be displayed on the effect display device 9 as in the above-described hold change effect. As described above, when displaying the button operation promotion image and the remaining acceptance period meter both during the deceleration period of the hold change effect and during the execution of the button operation effect, the update speed of the button operation promotion image during the deceleration period (push Update speed of the button operation promotion image in the button operation effect and update acceptance of the button operation promotion image and the update speed of the remaining acceptance period meter of the image showing the state where the button 120 is not operated and the image showing the state where the push button 120 is operated The same as the update speed of the period meter, that is, the update speed of the button operation prompting image and the update speed of the remaining acceptance period meter are executed at the same speed (update speed) regardless of whether the deceleration control is performed. May be

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a hold change presentation execution determination table. The hold change presentation execution determination table is used to determine whether to execute a hold change presentation. In particular, FIG. 18 (A) shows a big hit on hold change effect execution determination table, and FIG. 18 (B) shows the off time on hold change effect execution determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. The big hit on hold change effect execution decision table is a table used when the pending storage serving as the target of the on hold change effect is a big hit. The on-off hold change effect execution determination table is a table used when the on-hold storage to be the target of the on-hold change effect is released. In any table, it is randomly selected whether or not to execute the pending change effect by random number SR2. As shown in the figure, the distribution mode is such that the ratio of “Yes” is selected in the big hit hold change production execution decision table is higher than that of the hold change display production execution decision table, especially The random numbers are distributed such that the probability of becoming a big hit is higher in the case where the on-hold change effect is performed than in the case where the on-hold change effect is performed. By using the hold change presentation execution determination table shown in FIG. 18, the player can be interested in the hold change presentation.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a pending change mode determination table. The hold change mode determination table is used to determine a change in color of the hold display H in the hold change presentation. In particular, FIG. 19A shows a big hit retention change mode determination table, and FIG. 19B shows a loss retention change mode determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. The jackpot hold change mode determination table is a table used when a hold storage serving as a target for hold change presentation is a big hit. The on-off hold change mode determination table is a table used when the on-hold storage that is the target of the on-hold change effect is released. In any table, the change of the color of the hold indication H is distributed by random number SR3 and is drawn.

  The on-hold change presentation includes a success pattern and a failure pattern (see FIG. 17). The success pattern is a pattern in which the color ball breaks and the color of the hold display H changes, and the color of the hold display changes to blue, green, or red. The failure pattern is a pattern in which the color ball does not break, and hence the color of the hold display H does not change. The color of the changed hold indication H indicates the expectation that the hold indication H corresponds to the big hit, for example, red is the highest big hit expectation, the next is green, and the next is blue. Also, if the color does not change, the jackpot expectation is lower than in any case where the color changes. As described above, in order to suggest the jackpot expectation according to the color, in the hold change mode determination table, the random numbers SR3 corresponding to the respective colors are allocated as shown in FIG. The color of the hold display H before the color change may be any color other than blue, green, and red, and is, for example, white.

  By using the hold change mode determination table shown in FIG. 19, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the changing color as well as whether or not the color of the hold display H changes.

  FIG. 20 shows a deceleration period determination table. The deceleration period determination table is used to determine the deceleration period when executing deceleration control of the color ball in the hold change effect. The deceleration period is a period from when the velocity of the color ball released by the character begins to decelerate to a velocity different from the initial velocity, and until the deceleration is completed. In particular, FIG. 20A shows a success pattern deceleration period determination table, and FIG. 20B shows a failure pattern deceleration period determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. The success pattern deceleration period determination table is a table used when the on-hold change presentation is a success pattern. The failure pattern deceleration period determination table is a table used when the hold change effect is a failure pattern. In any table, it is randomly selected by random number SR4 whether the deceleration period is to be 3 seconds or 5 seconds. As shown in the figure, the mode of distribution is such that the success pattern deceleration period determination table has a higher rate at which the deceleration period of 5 seconds is selected than the failure pattern deceleration period determination table. The random numbers are distributed so that the degree of expectation that the on-hold change effect becomes a success pattern is higher than the case where the deceleration period is long is shorter than when the deceleration period is short. Here, although 3 seconds and 5 seconds were illustrated as a plurality of deceleration periods, other deceleration periods may be adopted, and three or more deceleration periods may be adopted. Note that the deceleration period may be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit.

  As described above, since the degree of expectation of success patterns differs depending on the difference in the deceleration period, the player can be made to pay attention to the deceleration period. In particular, regardless of which deceleration period is set, since the period from the character throwing away the ball to entering the deceleration period is the same, the player is decelerated when the ball starts to decelerate. It is possible to maintain the player's sense of anticipation without realizing the long and short of the period.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a presentation execution timing determination table. This table is stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. The effect execution timing determination table is used to determine how many times the hold indication H is shifted when a plurality of hold indications H exist, to execute the hold change effect. When a plurality of hold displays H exist, the hold display TH to be subjected to the hold change presentation is a hold display H to be digested at the end of the plurality of hold displays H. For example, if the hold indication H is three, the third hold indication TH from the left is the target of the hold change effect, and if the hold indication H is eight, the eighth hold indication TH from the left is hold It is the target of change production. Using the effect execution timing determination table, it is determined by random number lottery how many times the target holding display TH is shifted to the left (at how many holding memories have been stored), the holding change presentation is to be performed.

  In the effect execution timing determination table, the proportion (as a percentage display) of the random numbers allocated to the execution timings of the hold change effect is shown for the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. For example, when the total number of pending storages is 2, the second pending display TH from the left is the target of the pending change presentation, but the timing of the presentation in this case is when the shift occurs once (the number of shifts = 1) is determined. That is, the hold change presentation is started when the hold display H on the left side of the two hold displays H changes to the active display AH and the hold display TH on the right side shifts to the left.

  When the total number of pending storages is 4, the fourth pending display from the left is the target of the H pending change presentation, but the timing of the presentation in this case is when the shift occurs once (the number of shifts = 1 ), When two shifts occur (number of shifts = 2), and when three shifts occur (number of shifts = 3) by random number lottery. The determination ratio is as follows: shift number = 1 is 45%, shift number = 2 is 30%, and shift number = 3 is 25%.

  As understood from the effect execution timing determination table, regardless of the total number of pending storages, the percentage at which the pending change presentation is executed at the stage where the number of shifts is small is the stage where the number of shifts is larger It is higher than the rate at which rendition is performed. As a result, it is possible to increase the execution opportunity of the on-hold change presentation as much as possible.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing pre-reading advance notice processing. The on-hold change effect is realized by this flowchart. This flowchart is a subroutine of S500 of FIG. First, it is determined by the effect control CPU 101 whether deceleration control is already being executed (S501a). If the deceleration control is already being executed, the prefetch notice preparation processing is ended, and if the deceleration control is not being executed, it is determined whether it is time to receive the total suspension storage number designation command and the variation type command ( S501b). If the command is not received, the process ends. If the command is received, it is determined whether the change effect restriction flag is already set (S502). The change presentation restriction flag is a flag for which the set state is held from when the execution of the pending change presentation is determined to when the presentation is finished. The change production restriction flag is a flag for preventing the execution of the hold change presentation from being newly determined even though the hold change presentation has not been finished.

  Therefore, the process ends when the change presentation restriction flag is set, but when it is not set, it is determined whether the total number of holdings is 2 or more (S503). If the total number of holdings is not 2 or more, the processing is ended because the holding change effect is not performed, but if the total number of holdings is 2 or more, whether or not the new holding memory is the variation pattern type of reach It is determined (S504). Here, “new pending storage” is the latest pending storage among a plurality of pending storages (S 503), in other words, the pending storage corresponding to the pending display H displayed on the right side It is. As described above with reference to FIG. 22, such pending storage may be selected as a target of the pending change presentation. Therefore, in S505, it is determined whether or not the pending storage that can be selected as the target of the pending change presentation is a big hit.

  When it is determined in S505 that the new pending storage is a big hit, the presence or absence of the pending change presentation is determined according to the big hit pending change presentation execution determination table (S506), and the pending change occurs in S507 If it is determined that the hold change mode is determined, then the hold change mode is determined by the jackpot change mode determination table (S508). The pending change mode is roughly classified into success patterns and failure patterns. The success pattern is a pattern in which the color ball that has hit the hold indication TH breaks and the color of the hold indication changes, and the failure pattern causes the color ball that hit the hold indication TH to bounce without breaking, resulting in the hold indication TH It is a pattern whose color does not change. The success pattern is further divided into three patterns of blue, green and red in which the color of the changing display TH changes. In S508, it is determined whether to be a failure pattern or three success patterns. If it is determined in S507 that no hold change occurs (no hold change effect is present), the process ends. The big hit retention change effect execution execution determination table is as shown in FIG. 18A, and the big hit retention change mode determination table is as shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in S505 that the new hold storage is a release, the presence / absence of execution of the hold change presentation is determined according to the release hold change presentation execution determination table (S515), and the hold changes in S515 (hold change presentation) If it is determined that the hold change mode is determined, then the hold change mode is determined by the out-of-hold change mode determination table (S517). In S517, it is determined which one of the three success patterns of blue, green and red the failure pattern or the changing color of the pending display TH should be. If it is determined in S516 that no hold change occurs (no hold change effect is present), the process ends. The loss-on-hold change effect execution determination table is as shown in FIG. 18 (B), and the loss-on-hold change mode determination table is as shown in FIG. 19 (B).

  In the process of S508 or S517, when the pending change mode is determined to be the success pattern (YES in S509), the period for deceleration control is determined by the success pattern deceleration period determination table (S510). On the other hand, in the process of S508 or S517, when the pending change mode is determined to be the failure pattern (NO in S509), the period for which the deceleration control is performed is determined by the failure pattern deceleration period determination table (S510). The success pattern deceleration period determination table is as shown in FIG. 20 (A), and the failure pattern deceleration period determination table is as shown in FIG. 20 (B). The deceleration control period (deceleration period) is determined to be either 3 seconds or 5 seconds as shown in FIG.

  After the deceleration period for setting the success pattern is determined in S510, it is determined that the button notification effect is to be performed (S511). The button notification effect is an effect of notifying the player of the success pattern by vibrating the push button 120 before the color ball 931 breaks, as described with reference to FIG.

  After S511 or S518, a change presentation restriction flag is set (S512). Next, the execution timing of the on-hold change presentation is determined by the presentation execution timing determination table (S513). The effect execution timing determination table is as shown in FIG. By this processing, it is determined how many holding display THs to be subjected to the holding change presentation are shifted to execute the holding change presentation. Next, the content determined in the pre-reading advance notice process is stored in the storage area (S514), and the process ends.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process.

  In the effect symbol variation start process, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the variation display result is to be out (S601). Whether or not it is determined to be out of place is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is determined to be out of order, it is checked whether a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received as the fluctuation pattern command (S602). Whether or not the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received is determined by, for example, data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received, the display result of out-of-reach is determined as the final stop of the effect pattern using the out-of-pattern determination data table stored in the ROM 102 (S604) , S616. In the off symbol determination data table, numerical data of SR1-1 to SR1-3 are associated with each of a plurality of types of effect symbols.

  In the process of S604, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and a symbol corresponding to the extracted numerical data is left and middle, respectively, using the data design table for determining the outlying symbols. , It is determined as a combination of stop symbols that result in the fluctuation display result of the right effect symbols. Thus, when determining the combination of non-reach losing symbols, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number accidentally matches the combination of the big hit symbols, the correction is made to become the combination of the missing symbols (for example, Each stop symbol is determined by correcting the right symbol by shifting one symbol). Also, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number happens to be the reach symbol, it is corrected so that it becomes a combination of non-reach out-of-out symbols (for example, correction for shifting the right symbol by 1 symbol) and each stop symbol Is determined.

  If it is determined in the process of S602 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (if it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), the stop symbol of the rendering symbol constituting the combination of reach symbols is determined (S605), and the process proceeds to S616. In the process of S605, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at predetermined timings, and the symbols corresponding to the random numbers extracted from SR1-1 are used using the data design table for determining the outlying symbols. A symbol corresponding to a random number determined as the stop symbol of each of the left and right effect symbols forming the reach state and corresponding to the value of the counter extracted from SR1-2 is determined as the stop symbol of the middle symbol. Also in this case, when it happens to be a combination of big hit symbols, each stop symbol is determined by correcting (for example, correcting the middle symbol by one symbol) so as to become the combination of the out symbols.

  In addition, when it is not determined to shift in the processing of S601 (when it is determined to be a big hit) (N in S601), the CPU 101 for effect control has a big hit symbol according to the type of the big hit. The stop design of the production design which constitutes combination is decided (S603), it advances to S616.

  In S603, a combination of hit symbols is determined according to the type of the big hit as follows. The type of big hit from among the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit based on which display result specification command of the display result 2 specification command and the display result 3 specification command is stored in the display result specific command storage area If it is determined that it is decided to make a big hit in a definite variation, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of the SR1-1 and the big variation in a big design (for example, left, Using the data table (table for determining the probability of big hit symbol design) with the relationship between the middle and the right with the odd number combination such as "7,7,7" etc., any positive variation big hit symbol from the extracted value Select and decide the combination of Also, when it is determined that it is determined to be a big hit normally, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 and a big hit symbol (for example, left, middle, etc. Using the data table (usually a big hit design determination table) in which the right is set to a relation of "4, 4, 4", etc. with an even number of square eyes, a combination of any of the normal big hit symbols from the extraction value Choose and decide. The symbol determined in this manner is used as a final stop symbol which is a variable display result before being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  Next, after effect setting processing (S616) for performing processing (for example, processing such as determination of contents of various effects shown in FIG. 49) for setting various effects in the variable display is performed, the process proceeds to S617. The effect setting process will be described later.

  In S617, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of effect control patterns. In S617, the symbol variation control pattern table according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and various effect control (rendering operation) patterns designated by the effect control pattern of the effect decided in the process of S616, etc. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the designated various effect operation patterns is selected and determined as the use pattern.

  In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 102, for example, the effect in the display area of the effect display device 9 in the period from when fluctuation of the effect design is started to when the finalized design symbol becoming the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Data indicating the control content of various rendering operations such as the variable display operation of the symbol, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation by the effect of the pseudo ream, and the effect display operation in the advance effect It is stored.

  In addition, each design fluctuation control pattern, for example, the production control process timer set value, the production control process timer determination value, the production display control data, the voice control data, the LED control data, and the variation display of the production symbol such as the end code The control data for controlling the various rendering operations according to the contents are included, and the contents of the various rendering control, the switching timing of the rendering control, and the like are set in time series.

  Next, a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern selected in S617 is selected (S618). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S619).

  When the process of S619 is executed, the rendering device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the effect component as the effect component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound number data 1) Control of various LEDs and the speaker 27) as an effect part is started (S620). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, a command is output to VDP 109 in order to cause an effect display device 9 to display an image (including an effect pattern) according to the fluctuation pattern. In addition, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED driver substrate 35 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of light emitters such as various LEDs. Further, in order to cause the speaker 27 to output an audio, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 70.

  Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display time timer (S621), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol processing (S802). Design fluctuation start processing is executed (S 622). And, the effect design fluctuation start processing ends.

  In the character 930 shown in FIG. 17, the microcomputer issues one of a plurality of predetermined speeds (for example, three types of low speed, medium speed, and high speed) to throw the color ball 931 at any of a plurality of speeds. It may be selected each time. In that case, instead of merely selecting the speed at random, for example, depending on the selected speed, the ratio of success or failure pattern may be different.

  Furthermore, a plurality of positions where the character 930 throws may be set. For example, the microcomputer may select each time from a far distance position where the distance from the target hold display is long and a near distance position where the distance is closer to the long distance position. In such a case, the faster the initial speed of the color ball 931 at the long distance position, the easier it becomes the success pattern, and the slower the initial speed of the color ball 931 at the short distance position, the easier it becomes the success pattern. When the initial speed of the color ball 931 at a long distance position is slow, it takes a long time before the color ball 931 collides with the target display of the object, so the effect is extended, but by making the initial speed faster It can be prevented that it is extended. On the other hand, if the initial speed of the color ball 931 at the short distance position is fast, the color ball 931 collides with the target holding display TH in a short time, so there is a possibility that the player can not enjoy the effects sufficiently. By delaying the time, it is possible to secure time for the player to fully enjoy the effect.

  Even when the character 930 throws the color ball 931 at any one of a plurality of speeds, it is conceivable that the speed at the time of deceleration when entering the deceleration period is common to all. By sharing the speed at the time of deceleration, it is possible to simplify the speed reduction control as compared with the case where the speed at the time of deceleration is selectively set among a plurality of speeds.

  In the on-hold change effect, the deceleration control may not necessarily be involved, and the deceleration control may not be involved. In this case, the player's expectation for the execution of the deceleration control should be enhanced if it is designed such that the one with the deceleration control has higher expectation than the one with the deceleration control than in the case without it. Can.

  The deceleration period of the color ball can be set variously. For example, the speed may be returned to the original speed before the color ball collides with the hold indication TH. Further, even if the pattern is a success pattern, the push button 120 may not vibrate. In addition, even if it is a failure pattern, the push button 120 may vibrate even though the ratio is lower than that of the success pattern.

  When executing a pattern in which the rendering result fails, the color ball does not collide with the target hold display TH while the deceleration control continues, but the color ball speed returns to the original speed before the collision, After colliding with the hold indication TH and rebounding, the vehicle may pass without falling or falling into the hold indication TH.

  As an example in which the action display acts on the predetermined display, an example in which the color ball acts is given here. However, instead of such an action indication, for example, the action indication may be made by giving an effect such that the periphery of the target retention indication TH changes to a color different from the color of the periphery of the other retention indication H.

  In addition, when performing deceleration control, an area including a change target (pending display or active display as predetermined display, etc.) and an action (color ball as action display) in the background image in accordance with the timing of deceleration. The brightness of the screen may be changed with other areas. Specifically, it is possible to make the user pay attention to a specific effect (hold change effect or active hold change effect described later) by darkening the background image other than the change target and the action at the deceleration timing. Conversely, highlighting may be performed by brightening the change target and the agent, or by adding a predetermined effect image to the change target and the agent. The setting of the brightness may be performed on only one of the change target and the action.

  The on-hold change effect shown in FIG. 17 is an effect related to a change in the on-hold display H. However, such an effect may be diverted to an active hold change effect relating to a change in active display. Specifically, referring to FIG. 17, character 930 does not throw the ball toward holding display H, but effects directing the ball toward active display AH. As the content of the effect, it is assumed that the success pattern and the failure pattern are changed according to the one described with reference to FIG. The control may also be performed using the tables shown in FIGS.

  The deceleration control may be performed other than the on-hold change effect or the on-hold change effect. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed at the center of the screen during fluctuation, and deceleration control may be performed when the action display acts on the predetermined image. The predetermined image is an image that is not related to the hold display H or the active display AH. Then, by the action display acting on a predetermined image, a successful pattern and a failing pattern may be provided. In the successful pattern, the action display may be completed by acting on the predetermined image to prompt the operation of the operation unit such as the push button 120 or the like. Such an effect may be performed in a normal gaming state, or may be performed during a high probability or during a short time. More specifically, if an image of a hand is displayed at the center of the screen during high probability, an image showing a button jumps there, deceleration control is started in front of the hit, and an image of the hand catches the button image , And may be developed into an effect of an operation promotion display prompting a button operation, and the effect may be ended if the hand image can not catch the image of the button. Then, by operating the push button while the effect of the operation promotion display is being performed, an effect may be performed in which an image indicating that a big hit or a loss has occurred is displayed.

  The pending display may be represented by something other than an image. For example, the hold indication H may be indicated by lighting of an LED or the like. Then, the deceleration control of the image shown as the action display may be performed before the LED corresponding to the hold display TH. In the failure pattern, the lighting color of the LED is not changed, and in the success pattern, the lighting color of the LED may be changed.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining the active hold change presentation. Active pending change presentation is an example of specific presentation relating to active display. In addition, the active hold change presentation is positioned as one of the presentation for giving notice of the operation regarding the on-going variable display by changing the mode of the active display.

  The active hold change presentation introduced here is an presentation showing whether or not the color of the active display changes by the color ball thrown away toward the active display hitting the active display and being split. The setting here is based on the premise that the color ball must always hit the target holding display, and the player is entertained with an effect of whether or not the ball is broken. If the ball splits beautifully and the color of the active display changes, the rendering result is successful, and if the color of the active display does not change without the ball breaking, it is a failure. When successful, the degree of expectation that the result of the on-going variable display becomes a big hit is higher than that when unsuccessful, and the degree of expectation also differs depending on the changing color (see FIG. 26).

  For example, the variations of the color are blue, green and red. Such a color difference represents, for example, a difference in the degree of expectation that the on-going variable display becomes a big hit. For example, red has the highest jackpot expectation, followed by green and then blue. Except for the fact that the target is an active display and that there is no deceleration period, the active reserve change effect shown in FIG. 24 shares the effect contents with the on-hold change effect described with reference to FIG.

  In particular, the difference between the active reserve change effect shown in FIG. 24 and the reserve change effect shown in FIG. 17 lies in the success rate (the color of the active display changes) depending on the position of the character 930 throwing the color ball 931. The rate at which the success pattern comes to the highest color (red) at the stage of the big hit expectation is the point of difference. The type of the character 930 is the same regardless of the difference in the position. As described above, since the character 930 is common, it is possible to make the player feel as if the character 930 moved the place when the position is changed. However, different characters may be displayed depending on the position.

  The effects will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. The active display area AHA, the active display AH, and the hold display H are displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 during the variable display of the effect pattern indicated by the three downward arrows.

  Referring to FIG. 24 (a), character 930 carrying color ball 931 appears at position A during the variable display of the effect pattern. When the character 930 appears, it is displayed on the screen that the operation of the push button is effective (not shown). At this time, when the push button 120 is operated once, the character 930 moves from the position A to the position B, and when the push button 120 is operated once, the character 930 moves from the position B to the position C, and further the push button One operation of 120 moves the character 930 from position C to position A. As described above, in response to the operation of the push button 120, the position of the character 930 changes repeatedly as A → B → C → A → B. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of changing the start position of the effect. From the active display AH, the position A is closest and the position C is farthest. FIG. 24B shows a state in which the position C is selected as the position of the character 930. Note that the effective period of the operation is predetermined, and the effective period of the operation may be counted down on the screen.

  FIG. 24C shows that the character 930 is throwing the color ball 931 from the position A closest to the active display AH. The color ball 931 eventually collides with the active display AH. Subsequently, FIG. 24 (d) shows that the color ball 931 is finely broken and the color of the active display AH is changed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 24E shows that the character 930 throws the color ball 931 from the position C farthest from the active display AH. The color ball 931 eventually collides with the active display AH. Next, FIG. 24 (f) shows that the color ball 931 bounces without being broken. Therefore, at this time, the color of the active display AH does not change.

  In this active hold change effect, the closer the position where the character 930 throws the ball to the active display AH, the higher the rate at which the effect is a success pattern, and therefore the higher the rate at which the color of the active display AH rises. Therefore, from that point of view only, the player desires to set the position of the character 930 to the position A by operating the push button 120. However, in this active hold change effect, the proportion of the color of the active display AH that can only be achieved in red among the three types of colors as the position where the character 930 throws a ball is closer to the active display AH. Is high.

  That is, if the active display is a big hit, the color of the active display AH should normally be raised to the red with the highest expected hit in the success pattern, but the position of the character 930 at that time is at the position A. If it is set, the success pattern is selected at a high rate, but the rise color at that time is set to the lowest expectation blue instead of red. In other words, although the position A is easy to see the effect of the rise, the color of the rise indicated by the effect does not reach the color corresponding to the expected level of the big hit, but the stage of It means that the possibility of being restricted to low color is high. In this case, the player has to feel anxious feeling that the original rising color according to the jackpot expectation degree may be a color higher than that.

  On the other hand, as the position where the character 930 throws the ball is farther from the active display AH, the ratio of the effect becoming a success pattern is lower, so the chance of being able to see the rising effect decreases, but fortunately, the success pattern When you can see, the color of the rise at that time is that it is highly likely to be the color corresponding to the original big hit expectation. For example, if a presentation is performed at the most street position C from the active display AH when a big hit is determined, a success pattern is unlikely to occur, but if a success pattern occurs, the color at that time is the actual expectation It will be shown. As a result, the player can detect the true jackpot expectation from the color that has developed.

  As described above, in this active reserve change presentation, the ratio of the success pattern and the degree of the color restriction created when the presentation becomes the success differ depending on the position at which the presentation is started. In order to realize such an effect, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, the color of the rise of the active display AH in the success pattern is determined in two steps.

  As a first step, without considering the position of the character 930, the upset color is determined from the viewpoint of whether or not the active display is a big hit. The color determined at this time is referred to as the "final color". Since the final color is a color determined from the viewpoint of whether or not the active display is a big hit, the color faithfully reflects the expectation that the active display will be a big hit. However, whether the determined “final color” is actually used for rendering or a color with a lower expected level of big hit is used for rendering depends on the determination in the next second stage.

  As a second step, the indicator representing the jackpot expectation is “finally” by actually using the “final color” determined in the first step for presentation in consideration of the pitching position of the character, or by applying a limitation thereto. Color "Decide if you want the following color. For example, even if the "final color" is red, the color to be adopted as the actual rising color is blue if a restriction is applied. The details of the determination of these first and second stages will become more apparent from the description of FIGS. 26-29 and 31.

  In this active on-hold change effect, since the position closer to the active display AH has higher expectation of the success pattern, it is possible to provide an effect consistent with the player's assumption that the near position is likely to change. In this active reserve change effect, the effect of the deceleration control described with reference to FIG. 17 may be added, and as a failure pattern, an effect that the thrown ball does not hit the active display also occurs It may be set to be possible.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an active hold change presentation execution determination table. The active hold change presentation execution determination table is used to determine whether to execute the active hold change presentation. Whether or not to execute the active hold change presentation is randomly selected by random number SR5. As shown in the figure, the mode of the distribution is set such that the ratio of presence of production and non-production is 2: 3. This table is stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an active-hold final color determination table. The active hold final color determination table is used to determine the type of color (color of upset) when changing the color of the active display in the active hold change presentation. As already explained, the rise color actually used for rendering may be different from the "final color" determined here. In particular, FIG. 26A shows a big hit active hold final color determination table, and FIG. 18B shows an off active hold final color decision table. These tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80.

  The big hit active hold final color determination table is a table used when the active display targeted for the active hold change presentation is a big hit. Out-of-time active hold final color determination table is a table used when the active display targeted for active hold change presentation is out. In each table, the “final color” is distributed by random number SR5 and is drawn. As shown in the figure, with respect to the mode of distribution, for no change, the selectivity is higher in the case of outliers than in the case of big hit, and for blue, green and red, the probability of big hit becomes higher in that order It is considered to be an aspect like this. The “final color” is a provisionally determined uprising color selected based on the active hold final color determination table regardless of the position of the character to be thrown.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process. The effect setting process is a subroutine executed in S616 of FIG. First, it is determined whether or not a change presentation restriction flag is set (S901). When the change presentation restriction flag is set, the process is terminated so that the presentation is not performed redundantly. On the other hand, when the change production restriction flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation to be executed this time is reach (S902). When it is not reach, the processing is ended. From the table, the presence or absence of execution of the active hold change presentation is determined (S903). The active hold change presentation execution determination table is as shown in FIG.

  In S904, when it is determined that the active reserve change effect is performed, it is determined whether the currently displayed variable display is a big hit, that is, whether the active display corresponds to a big hit (S905). If it is a big hit, the final color of the active hold is determined by the big hit active hold final color determination table (S906), and if it is not a big hit or a fall, the active hold final color decision table is active hold The final color of is determined (S908). The big hit active hold final color determination table and the off active hold final color determination table are as shown in FIG. By these determination processes, a rising color when the active hold change presentation is successful is tentatively determined.

  After S906 or S908, the determined content is stored in the storage area (S907), and the process ends.

  FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing processing during effect symbol variation. The effect symbol variation process is a subroutine executed in S802 of FIG. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (S842). Then, it is determined whether the process timer has timed out (S843).

  If the process timer has not timed out (S843; N), the process proceeds to S849. If the process timer has timed out in S843 (S843; Y), process data is switched (S844). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer set value set next in the process table to the process timer (S845). Further, it is determined whether a lower tray error notification flag indicating that a lower tray error notification to be described later is being issued is set (S846).

  If the lower tray error notification flag is not set (S 846; N), the rendering device (the display control execution data, the LED control execution data, and the process data such as the sound number data, etc. set next) Control the rendering device according to the contents of the next process data, such as changing the control state for the rendering components (S847). If the lower tray error notification flag is set (S846; Y), then Out of the set display control execution data, LED control execution data, and process data such as sound number data, the rendering device excluding the frame LED 28 based on the process data such as display control execution data and sound number data Control the rendering device according to the contents of the next process data, such as changing the control state for the part) (S848)

In S849, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the lower tray error notification flag is set.
When the lower tray error notification flag is not set (S849; N), a rendering device (for presentation based on process data such as display control execution data corresponding to the process timer, LED control execution data, and sound number data Control the rendering device according to the contents of the next process data, such as changing the control state for parts (S850). If the lower tray error notification flag is set (S849; Y), respond to the process timer. Of the process data such as display control execution data, LED control execution data, and sound number data, based on the process data such as display control execution data and sound number data Control the rendering device according to the contents of the next process data, such as changing the control state (S8 1).

  After the execution of S847, S848, S850, and S851, an operation effect process is performed according to the operation of the push button 120 (S852). Details of the operation effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, based on the value of the fluctuation time timer, it is checked whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out (S853). If the fluctuation time timer has timed out (Y in S853), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S803) (S855). On the other hand, when the fluctuation time timer has not timed out (N in S853), it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination specification command has been received is set (S854). When the confirmation command reception flag is not set (N in S854), the process of the effect symbol variation is finished. On the other hand, when the determination command reception flag is set (Y in S854), the process proceeds to S855. As described above, even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out (N in S853), the control shifts to control to stop fluctuation when the symbol determination designation command is received. Even when the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation time is received, it is possible to end the fluctuation of the rendering pattern when the normal fluctuation time has elapsed (when the fluctuation of the special symbol is ended).

  FIG. 29 is a view showing the relationship between the start position of the effect, the success rate, and the change rate. The data of the correspondence shown in the figure is stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. As described in conjunction with the description of the active reserve change presentation using FIG. 24, in the active reserve change presentation, depending on the position at which the presentation is started, the proportion that becomes the success pattern and the color that rises when it becomes the success pattern The degree of restriction is different. Positions A, B, and C shown in FIG. 29 correspond to the respective positions on the screen shown in FIG.

  When the character throws a color ball at the position A closest to the active display, that is, when the active hold change effect is started at the position A, the rate (success rate, expectation) that the success pattern is selected as the effect pattern is 100. %. That is, when the active hold change presentation is started at the position A closest to the active display among the positions, the player can always see the presentation of the success pattern. However, at that time, the percentage of the final display color determined temporarily according to the display result of the variable display is only 20%, and the percentage of the big hit expectation is 80%. It is determined to be the lowest first stage color, that is, blue.

  When the character throws a color ball at the position C farthest from the active display, that is, when the active hold change effect is started at the position C, the rate (success rate) that the success pattern is selected as the effect pattern is only 20%. Absent. That is, when the active hold change effect is started at the position C farthest from the active display among the positions, the player sees the effect of the success pattern as compared with the case where the effect is started at other positions. There is less chance of doing it. However, the percentage of the final display color of the active display determined according to the display result of the variable display is 100%, and if the success pattern can be seen, The player can have confidence in the degree of expectation of the big hit indicated by the rising color at that time.

  Therefore, from the viewpoint that the player wants to see the success pattern as much as possible or to increase the reliability of the rising color indicated by the success pattern, the position at which the active hold change presentation is started is operated by his own operation. It can be selected. For this reason, the player's intention can be reflected in the effect, and more interesting player participation type effects can be provided.

  In addition, the success rate and the change rate of color shown in FIG. 29 can be variously adjusted in the range which can exhibit the effect mentioned above. For example, at position A, the color may not change to the final color and may change to only the first color, and at position C, the color may change to the first color at a very slight rate. It may be possible to Also, when changing at the position C, it may be changed to a special aspect (special color) that can be seen only at the position C. The special mode is, for example, a mode in which the active display is displayed with a color that changes to rainbow when determined to be a big hit.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing operation effect processing. The operation effect process is a subroutine executed in S846 of FIG. First, it is determined whether or not to execute the active hold change presentation (S860). When the active hold change presentation is not performed, the process ends. However, when the active hold change presentation is performed, it is determined whether it is during the operation valid period of the push button 120 (S861). If it is not in the operation valid period of the push button 120, the process proceeds to S865. If it is in the operation valid period of the push button 120, it is determined whether the operation of the push button 120 is detected (S862). If the operation is not detected, the process proceeds to S864, but if the operation is detected, the start position of the active hold change presentation is changed according to the button operation (S863). Specifically, each time an operation is detected, the position of the character 930 shown in FIG. 24 is changed to position A → B → C → A → B.

  Next, it is judged whether or not it is the end time of the operation effective period (S864), but if it is not the end time the process is ended once, but if it is the end time, the start position of the effect selected at the current time From the above, the content of the active hold change presentation is determined according to “the relationship between the start position of the presentation and the success rate and the change rate” shown in FIG. 29 (S865). As a result, in this step, whether the effect pattern is a success pattern in which the color appearance of the active display occurs or a failure pattern in which the color appearance of the active display does not occur, and when it is the success pattern, the appearance pattern It is determined whether the color is to be the “final color” previously determined in S906 or S908 of FIG. 27 or the color of one step (red). Next, the determined content is stored in the storage area (S866), and the process ends.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a modification 1 of the active hold change presentation. It is conceivable to add the effect pattern of the first modification described below to the pattern of the active hold change effect already described. The first modification is an example in which after the failure pattern of the active hold change presentation, the battle production starts and the color of the active display suddenly rises without accompanying the action presentation such as a ball before the result of the battle production is obtained. . The battle effect is an effect indicating whether or not the current variable display is a big hit depending on the result of the outcome. Since the color of the active display is developed before the result of the battle production comes out, the color made up is to predict the result of the battle production.

  The first modification proceeds in the same manner as the failure pattern of the active hold change effect shown in FIG. 24 (FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (c)). In particular, in the example of FIG. 41, an example is shown in which the rendering is started from the position C farthest from the active display. As described above, when the effect is started from the position C farthest from the active display, the rate at which the failure pattern is selected is high (see FIG. 29). For this reason, the player who daresly select the position C as the start position of the presentation may not be able to see the success pattern, and may be disappointed.

  However, by making it possible to generate the pattern as in the first modification, it is possible to draw the player who has been disappointed once into the enjoyment of the effect to continue again. That is, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), when reach is generated on the screen after the failure pattern is displayed (FIG. 41 (d)), battle rendition on the screen is started. The player waits for the result, but in the middle of the battle rendition, the color of the active display is generated without any foresight (Fig. 41 (e)). It is desirable that the rising color at this time be the “final color” described with reference to FIG. Then, the player can infer the possibility of the big hit with the original rising color in which the big hit expectation is reflected.

  Alternatively, in the pattern of the first modification, the player is not the “final color” desired for the player because of the failure pattern (FIG. 41C), and the big hit expectation degree is more than the “final color”. The indicator of may be made to have only a low color.

  Alternatively, such a pattern of the first modification may be implemented only when the display result is a big hit. In that case, the upset color may be a special color (eg, rainbow color) indicating that the big hit has been determined.

  By adding such a modification 1, the width of the effect can be expanded. In particular, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of disappointment when the failure pattern occurs. In addition, according to the success rate shown in FIG. 29, when the failure pattern is selected, the pattern of the modification 1 may be controlled to be selected by random number lottery. In addition, although it has been described here that the color of the active display is raised without any prior notice after the battle rendition, the remark serving as the indication may be added first.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 49, a second modification of the active hold change presentation will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram for describing a second modification of the active hold change presentation. It is conceivable to add the effect pattern of the second modification described below to the pattern of the active hold change presentation already described or to the one obtained by adding the first modification. Of course, as the active hold change effect, a pachinko gaming machine that executes only the second modification may be used.

  In the second modification, the color of the ball is sequentially changed while the character repeatedly alternates the ball between the right hand and the left hand within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and the predetermined time has elapsed. When the character is thrown toward the active display, the color of the active display is changed to the color of the ball. Hereinafter, the active hold change presentation related to the second modification will be referred to as "timer change presentation".

  FIG. 42A is a diagram for describing a display screen of the effect display device 9 when the timer change effect according to the second modification is performed. Moreover, FIG.42 (b)-(f) expand and show the display image regarding timer change presentation among the various images displayed on the display screen of the effect display apparatus 9. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 42, the suggestion display 910 includes a character image and a ball image 911. The suggestion display 910 is an image that suggests that the active display AH in the active display area AHA changes. Further, the timer display 920 is an image showing an execution time of the timer change effect. When the value of the timer display 920 becomes a value indicating 0 seconds, the character throws the ball image 911 so that the ball image 911 acts on the active display AH, and an effect that the display mode of the active display AH is changed is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), during the variable display, in the display area on the upper right of the effect display device 9, the timer change effect is executed. During the timer change effect, a suggestion display 910 in which the character plays a game and a timer display 920 displayed below the suggestion display 910 are superimposed and displayed on the display area of the effect display device 9. The suggestion display 910 and the timer display 920 are images to be superimposed and displayed in the upper right display area of the effect display device 9. In such an image, the area required for display does not become too large, so that various effects performed in the variable display can be prevented from being inhibited.

  Further, the timer display 920 indicates an execution period of the timer change effect. Specifically, in the timer display 920, updating of the counted value to be counted down is executed from the initial value of the clock value set at a predetermined timing, and finally, the value of the timer display indicates 0 (0 seconds Value). Based on the value of the display of the timer becoming 0, the display mode of the predetermined display is changed in relation to the timer change effect being executed. The timer change effect is an effect until the value of the timer display 920 becomes 0 in this manner and the display mode of the predetermined display changes. Such timer display 920 counts down the digital display over time. Here, the timer display 920 actually counts down also for the two digits below the second, but is not disclosed in detail on the drawing. In addition, it is possible to count down only the number of seconds such as “10”, “9”.

  As shown in FIG. 42B, at the start of the timer change effect, the character and the ball image 911 are displayed as a suggestion display 910 that suggests that the display mode of the active display AH changes. The color of the ball image 911 at the start of the timer change effect is blue. Such a blue color is the same as the color of the hold display H shown in the hold display area 18c. The hold display H is displayed in blue. Further, the active display AH is usually displayed in blue, and the color may change due to the timer change effect. In the color of the active display AH, the jackpot expectation increases in the order of blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow color. The character throws a ball image 911 upwards to be a beanbag. The timer display 920 displays “10:00”, which indicates that the timer change effect is executed for 10 seconds.

  After 3 seconds have elapsed from the state of FIG. 42B, as shown in FIG. 42C, the timer display 920 displays “07:00” indicating that the remaining time of the timer change effect is 7 seconds. . At this time, the color of the ball image 911 changes from blue to green (hatched in the drawing). The change in color improves the jackpot expectation. Then, after 9 seconds have passed from the start of the timer change presentation, as shown in FIG. 42 (d), the timer display 920 displays “01:00” indicating that the remaining time of the timer change presentation is 1 second. Ru. The color of the ball image 911 is green as in the state of FIG. 42 (c).

  After one second has elapsed from the state of FIG. 42 (d) (after 10 seconds from the timer change effect), as shown in FIG. 42 (e), the timer display 920 shows “00:00” and the remaining time of the timer change effect is It is shown that it is 0 seconds. Then, when 0 seconds are reached, an effect is performed in which the character displayed as the suggestion display throws the ball image 911 toward the active display area AHA. The thrown ball image 911 hits the active display AH as shown in FIG. 42 (f). When the ball image 911 is hit, the display mode of the active display AH changes from blue to green of the related mode of the timer change effect. The change from blue to green improves the expectation of the variable display being performed.

  As described above, while the timer change effect is being executed, the timer display 920 can notify the execution period of the timer change effect, so as shown in FIGS. Can be made clear. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display value of the timer display 920 in a period until the timer display 920 reaches 0 seconds, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 42 (b) and (c), since the big hit expectation improves by changing the color of the ball image 911 in the suggestion display 910 during execution of the timer change effect, the ball image in the suggestion display 910 The player can be made to pay attention to the display mode of 911.

  FIG. 43 is a timing chart for explaining the execution period of the timer change effect. The horizontal axis of the timing chart indicates time (t), and the low level indicates the fluctuation stop, and the high level indicates the fluctuation. In the present embodiment, of the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach shown in FIG. 6, the timer change effect is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. The variation patterns of the super reach are provided with the variation patterns of the first to fourth super reach. When the variation pattern command specifying the variation pattern of the super reach is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control CPU 101 executes the effect of the designated super reach based on the transmitted command. In the first to fourth super reach in FIG. 6, any SP reach is executed from among a plurality of types of special reach (hereinafter, also simply referred to as SP reach) for each variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 43, in the SP reach, one of the effect symbols in the variable display is a reach. Thereafter, after reaching a reach state, after a predetermined time has elapsed (after normal reach or after reach effect different from normal reach), it develops into SP reach. The SP reach implemented in Super Reach is a high-expected reach that results in a big hit as compared to a normal reach that does not develop to an SP reach and does not produce a flashy effect after the reach. During the SP reach, for example, effects such as battle effects are executed on the liquid crystal screen. The battle effect is an effect such that a big hit display result is displayed when an ally character and an enemy character fight and the ally character wins, and an off display result is displayed when the ally character is defeated.

  The timer change presentation is performed in a period until such SP reach is performed. In this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the timer change effect before the SP reach. Also, with regard to the SP reach effect with a high probability of big hit, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect without inhibiting the effect by the SP reach.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a timer change presentation execution determination table. The timer change presentation execution determination table is a data table used for a lottery for determining whether to execute the timer change presentation. The timer change presentation execution determination table includes the jackpot timer change presentation execution determination table of FIG. 44 (A) and the disconnection timer change presentation execution determination table of FIG. 44 (B). These timer change presentation execution determination tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the presentation control board 80.

  According to the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing, the big hit time timer change effect execution determination table of FIG. 44 (A) has a magnitude relation that the selection ratio is “execute timer change effect> do not execute timer change effect”. Thus, the data is set such that the rate at which the decision to execute the timer change presentation is selected is higher. The out-of-time timer change presentation execution determination table in FIG. 44B has a magnitude relation that the selection ratio is “execute timer change presentation <do not execute timer change presentation” according to the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing. Thus, the data is set such that the rate at which the decision not to execute the timer change effect is selected is higher.

  When the display result of the variable display targeted for the timer change effect becomes the big hit display result by the setting of the data in FIGS. Rate will be higher. Therefore, when the timer change effect is executed, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be raised more than when the timer change effect is not executed.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a timer change presentation execution time determination table. The timer change presentation execution time determination table is a data table used for a lottery for determining the time (seconds) in which the timer change presentation is executed for each change. The timer change presentation execution time determination table includes the jackpot timer change presentation execution time determination table of FIG. 45 (A) and the disconnection timer change presentation execution time determination table of FIG. 45 (B). These timer change presentation execution time determination tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the presentation control board 80.

  The big hit timer change effect execution time determination table of FIG. 45 (A) shows that the selection ratio of the timer change effect execution time is “10 seconds <15 seconds <20 seconds” according to the value of SR3 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set such that the rate at which the long timer change presentation execution time (long number of seconds) is selected is higher. In the out-of-time timer change effect execution time determination table of FIG. 45B, the selection ratio of the timer change effect execution time is “10 seconds> 15 seconds> 20 seconds” according to the value of SR3 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set such that the rate at which the short timer change effect execution time (short number of seconds) is selected is higher.

  When the display result of the variable display targeted for the timer change effect becomes the big hit display result due to the setting of the data in FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B), the timer change effect of a longer time The percentage determined for execution time is high. Therefore, when the execution time of the timer change presentation is long, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be raised more than when the execution time of the timer change presentation is short. In this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which display mode of the timer display 920 is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45, a plurality of execution times of the timer change effect are provided. Therefore, since there are a plurality of display modes initially displayed as the timer display 920, effects by the timer display 920 become diverse, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a change number determination table for the timer change effect. In the change number determination table, the number of times of color change of the ball image 911 is determined in the timer change effect. The change number determination table includes the big hit time change number determination table of FIG. 46 (A) and the loss time change number determination table of FIG. 46 (B). These change number determination tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. The degree of expectation of becoming a big hit differs depending on the number of times of color change of the ball image 911.

  The timer change presentation execution time (seconds) in the change number determination table indicates the execution time of the timer change presentation. In this embodiment, the number of changes is set to two patterns every 10 seconds, 15 seconds, and 20 seconds. If the execution time of the timer change effect is 10 seconds, the number of times of change is determined to be either zero or one. The number of times of change being zero indicates that the color of the ball image 911 does not change from blue in the timer change effect. In addition, when the execution time of the timer change effect is 15 seconds, the number of times of change is determined to be either once or twice. In addition, when the execution time of the timer change effect is 20 seconds, the number of times of change is determined to be either twice or three times.

  In the big hit time change number determination table of FIG. 46 (A), the selection ratio is "0 times <1 time" according to the value of SR 4 extracted at a predetermined timing for the variable display with timer change effect execution time of 10 seconds. The data is set such that the rate of selection of a large number of changes is higher, so that the magnitude relationship is obtained. In addition, for variable display with a timer change effect execution time of 15 seconds, a large number of changes is selected so that the selection ratio has a magnitude relation of “1 time <2 times” by the value of SR4 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set to be higher for the rate of In addition, for the variable display with a timer change effect execution time of 20 seconds, a large number of changes is selected so that the selection ratio has a magnitude relationship of “2 times <3 times” by the value of SR4 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set to be higher for the rate of

  In the change time determination table of FIG. 46 (B), for the variable display with a timer change effect execution time of 10 seconds, the selection ratio is “0 times> 1 times” according to the value of SR4 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set such that the rate of selection of the small number of changes is higher so that the magnitude relationship of In addition, for the variable display with a timer change effect execution time of 15 seconds, a small number of changes is selected so that the selection ratio has a magnitude relation of “1 time> 2 times” by the value of SR4 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set to be higher for the rate of Further, with respect to the variable display with the timer change effect execution time of 20 seconds, data is set such that the value is constantly determined twice by the value of SR4 extracted at a predetermined timing. As described above, since there is no case in which the ball image 911 changes three times as a change pattern at the time of detachment, it is determined that a big hit occurs by changing three times.

  When the display result of the variable display targeted for the timer change effect becomes the big hit display result due to the setting of the data in FIGS. As for time, the ratio determined to be the number of more changes increases. Therefore, when the number of times of change of the ball image 911 is large in the timer change effect, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be raised more than when the number of times of change is small.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the timer change effect. In the change pattern determination table, the change pattern of the color of the ball image 911 in the timer change effect is determined. The change pattern determination table includes the big hit change pattern determination table of FIG. 47 (A) and the out-of-time change pattern determination table of FIG. 47 (B). These change pattern determination tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. Here, in the table shown in FIG. 47, the big hit expectation is higher as the color is changed. The jackpot expectation increases in the order of blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow color. Rainbow color is a color that is determined only in the case of a big hit.

  In the big hit change pattern determination table of FIG. 47 (A), when the number of changes is one, the selection ratio is ““ change pattern of blue → yellow ”<“ blue ”according to the value of SR5 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set such that the rate at which the change pattern that finally changes to green is selected is higher in order to have the magnitude relationship of “the change pattern of green”. Also, if the number of changes is two, the selection ratio is said to be “blue → yellow → green change pattern” <“blue → green → red change pattern” according to the value of SR5 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set such that the rate at which the change pattern that finally changes to red is selected so as to have a magnitude relationship is higher. When the number of changes is three, the selection ratio is “change pattern of“ blue → yellow → green → red ”<“ change of blue → green → red → rainbow ”according to the value of SR5 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set such that the rate at which the change pattern that finally changes to the rainbow color is selected is higher so as to have the magnitude relationship of “pattern”.

  When the number of changes is one, the out-of-time change pattern determination table in FIG. 47B has a selection ratio of ““ change pattern from blue to yellow ”>“ blue ”according to the value of SR5 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set such that the rate at which the change pattern that finally changes to yellow is selected is higher in order to have the magnitude relationship of “the change pattern of green”. In addition, when the number of changes is two, the selection ratio is “blue → yellow → green change pattern”> “blue → green → red change pattern” according to the value of SR5 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set such that the rate at which the change pattern that finally changes to green is selected so as to have a magnitude relationship is higher. In addition, in the case of detachment, it is not provided in the change pattern that changes three times.

  When the display result of the variable display targeted for the timer change effect becomes the big hit display result due to the setting of the data in FIGS. 47 (A) and (B), the final change is made as compared with the out display result. The rate at which the color of the ball image 911 becomes a color with a high hit expectation is high. Therefore, the type of color of the ball image 911 finally changed can increase the player's expectation for the jackpot.

  FIG. 48 shows a change timing determination table. In the change timing determination table, the change timing of the ball image 911 according to the number of changes is determined. In the change timing determination table of FIG. 48, when the timer change effect execution time is 10 seconds and the number of changes is one, the change timing (the timer display value at the time of change) is determined by the value of SR6 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set such that “7:00” and “2:00” are determined in a ratio of 1: 1. In addition, when the timer change effect execution time is 15 seconds and the number of changes is one, “10:00” is used as the change timing (timer display value at the time of change) according to the value of SR6 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that “5:00” and “5:00” are determined in a ratio of 1: 1.

  In addition, when the timer change effect execution time is 15 seconds and the number of changes is two, the first time “as the change timing (timer display value at the time of change)” is determined by the value of SR6 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is determined so that the timing of 10:00 ”, the second time“ 5:00 ”and the first time“ 13:00 ”and the second time“ 7:00 ”are determined at a ratio of 1: 1. It is set. In addition, when the timer change effect execution time is 20 seconds and the number of changes is two, the first time is "as the change timing (timer display value at the time of change)" by the value of SR6 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is determined so that the timing of 15:00, the second time "10:00" and the first time "13:00" and the second time "7:00" are determined at a 1: 1 ratio. It is set.

  In addition, when the timer change effect execution time is 20 seconds and the number of changes is 3, the first time is "as the change timing (timer display value at the time of change)" by the value of SR6 extracted at a predetermined timing. "15:00", the second time "10:00", the third time "5:00" and the first time "13:00", the second time "7:00", the third time "2:00" The data is set such that the timing of “1” is determined in a 1: 1 ratio.

  When the timer change presentation actual time and the number of changes are determined by the setting of the data in FIG. 48, it is possible to determine one of a plurality of change timings as the change timing. Further, since a plurality of change timings are provided as described above, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the timing at which the ball image 911 as the suggestion display 910 changes.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process (S616) in an effect pattern change start process for timer change effect. In FIG. 49, among the processes relating to the setting of various effects included in the effect setting process in the effect symbol variation start process, the process related to the setting of the timer change effect is shown. In the effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process to determine various effects to be executed in the timer change effect.

  First, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display executed this time is the fluctuation pattern specifying super reach based on the fluctuation pattern command received at the time of the fluctuation this time (S931). The received variation pattern command is stored in a command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 103. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the storage area of the RAM 103 and determines whether or not the super reach variation pattern is stored depending on whether or not the super reach variation pattern command is stored in the region indicating the variation display to be executed this time. judge. If it is not the change pattern of the super reach, it shifts to processing of S938. If it is a variation pattern of super reach, the value of SR2 is extracted, and using the extracted random number value and the timer change presentation execution determination table shown in FIG. Whether or not to execute the timer change effect is determined (S932). Whether the display result of the current fluctuation display is a big hit or not is judged by the display result command or the like received when the current fluctuation display is executed whether the display result of the fluctuation display executed this time is a big hit .

  In S933, based on the determination result of S932, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the timer change effect is performed (S933). If it is not determined to execute the timer change effect, the process proceeds to S938. If it is determined to execute the timer change presentation, the value of SR3 is extracted in S934, and the timer change presentation execution time (timer change presentation based on the extracted random number value and the timer change presentation execution time determination table shown in FIG. Determine the number of seconds to run Next, in S935, the value of SR4 is extracted, and the number of times (the number of changes) in which the color of the ball image 911 is changed during the timer change effect is determined based on the extracted random value and the change number determination table shown in FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S936, and SR5 is extracted, and the ball image is displayed depending on whether the display result of the current variable display is a big hit or not by the extracted random value and the change pattern determination table shown in FIG. A color change pattern of 911 is determined (S936). Next, in S937, the value of SR6 is extracted, and the change timing when the color of the ball image 911 changes in the timer change effect is determined from the extracted random value and the change timing determination table shown in FIG. 48 (S937). Since the color of the ball image 911 changes when the timer display 920 reaches a specific display value, the change timing also determines the timer display value at the time of the change.

  Next, in S938, in addition to the timer change effect, other effects to be executed during the current fluctuation display are determined, and the determined effects are set to be executed. In the effect setting process, data for executing the determined effect is stored in the RAM 103. The effect set in the effect setting process is selected as a effect control pattern, and based on the effect control pattern, in the effect symbol variation processing of S802, it is executed during the variation display of the effect symbol.

  A timer change effect may be executed on the hold indication H on which the hold change effect is performed. For example, the color of the hold indication H is changed from blue to yellow in the normal mode in the hold change effect. Then, when the changed hold display H is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA, the color of the active display AH may be further changed by the timer change effect.

  In such a case, the final color of the predetermined color is determined first depending on whether or not the start winning combination occurs, and the color of the hold display H changes halfway until the hold change effect In the timer change effect, the color of the active display AH may be controlled to change to the final color. In addition, the effect executed in the pre-read effect may be an effect completely unrelated to the effect using the timer display 920, or may be an effect that suggests that the effect using the timer display 920 is to be executed. For example, as an effect totally unrelated to the effect using the timer display 920, a predetermined character is made to appear, and the character performs a predetermined action such as hitting the hold indication H on which the hold change is executed. An effect may be considered such that the color of the hold indication H changes. Further, as an effect that suggests that the effect using the timer display 920 is executed, the display mode of the hold display H is changed to the preparation hold described as “during timer preparation”, and the fluctuation display for the change hold When is performed, the timer change effect may be performed so that the timer display 920 is displayed. In this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the execution of the timer change effect from the stage of the hold display H. Note that preparation suspension may not always be performed at the start of the change, and may not be performed. In addition, in the preparation suspension, the timer display 920 may be displayed (for example, the timer display is performed but the countdown is not performed) or the display may not be performed.

  As an effect for changing the active display AH, an active change effect different from the timer change effect may be executed. As the active change effect, for example, the display mode (for example, color) of the active display AH may be changed by an operation effect which causes the character to emit a beam to the active display AH. Such active change presentation may be performed either before or during SP reach. In such a case, the presentation period may be different between the active change presentation before the SP reach and the active change presentation during the SP reach. For example, the presentation period of the active change presentation may be long before the SP reach, and the presentation period of the active change presentation may be short during the SP reach. In this way, during the SP reach effect, the active change effect is executed in a short time, so the execution of the SP reach effect is not inhibited by the active change effect. Therefore, it is prevented that the effect of the SP reach effect is impaired, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, active change production during SP reach is to be executed in the time to the production of the final perversion about the fluctuation display (for example, the cut-in production of the final stage of reach where it is known after that whether it is a big hit, etc.) desirable.

  In addition, with regard to the active change effect during the SP reach, instead of shortening the effect period, the display of the active change effect is reduced, and even if the effect itself of the active change effect is made plain as compared to before the SP reach. Good. For example, before SP reach, a flashy effect is performed on the screen of effect display device 9 or features are operated, but if SP reach is performed, a simpler effect than before SP reach is performed. Good.

  Further, the active change effect and the timer change effect may be executable. In such a case, when the timer change effect is performed, the execution of the active change effect may be prohibited. Conversely, when the active change effect is executed, the execution of the timer change effect may be prohibited. In this way, it is possible to prevent the effects from becoming complicated and from being determined which player should pay attention to. In addition, as long as the active change effect and the timer change effect do not overlap, two effects may be performed during one variation display.

  The timer change presentation may be executed during the SP reach presentation. In such a case, the execution time of the timer change effect may be made different between before the start of the SP reach and during the SP reach. For example, the execution period of the timer change effect during the SP reach may be made shorter than the execution period before the SP reach. In this way, during the SP reach effect, since the timer change effect is executed in a short time, the execution of the SP reach effect is not inhibited by the timer change effect. Therefore, it is prevented that the effect of the SP reach effect is impaired, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The timer change presentation may be performed before reaching the reach, and the timer change presentation may not be performed after the reach. In this way, it is possible to concentrate the player on the effects after reaching.

  The timer change effect may be performed a plurality of times. For example, the color of the active display AH may be changed when the first timer change effect is executed, and the indication display 910 or the timer display 920 may be once erased. After that, the timer change effect may be executed again, and the color of the active display AH may be changed by the timer change effect.

  As shown in FIG. 46, as the execution time of the timer change effect increases, the rate at which the number of times of change is determined increases. And when the execution time of the timer change effect is short, there is also a case where it does not change (the number of times of change is zero). However, the active display AH may change whenever the timer change effect is executed. Moreover, even if it is determined to be a long time as the execution time of the timer change effect, there may be provided a case where the number of times of change is small or a case where it does not change.

  As shown in FIG. 47, in the case where the number of changes is one, there is no pattern that changes to red with a high expectation of big hit. However, if the number of changes is small, a pattern having a high hit probability may be provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 47B, in the case of detachment, a pattern changing three times was not provided, but a pattern changing three times may be provided also when the display result becomes detachment.

  The change timing determination table as shown in FIG. 48 may be different between the case of the big hit and the case of the change. For example, the change timing may be different depending on whether the display result of the variable display is the big hit display result or the off display result. In addition, a change timing (for example, change with the remaining “7: 77”, etc.) may be provided which is determined only when the big hit display result is obtained.

  The case where the timer change effect is executed is shown in any of the first to fourth super reach shown in FIG. However, the timer change presentation may be performed only for a specific super reach. For example, the timer change presentation may be performed only in the fourth super reach with a high hit probability.

  The timer display 920 has been described in which the digital display is counted down with time. However, the timer display 920 may count up the numbers with time, and the effect may be executed when the predetermined time is reached. Moreover, it does not display numerically as a period display indicating time lapse, but displays an hourglass image indicating time lapse (shows time by remaining sand of hourglass), or a gauge image indicating time lapse Any effect may be used as long as it is an effect that changes information that can indicate the end timing of a predetermined period with the passage of time, such as what is displayed using (indicating time by increasing or decreasing a gauge) .

  When timer change presentation is performed, the case where the number of seconds at the time of start of timer display 920 differs is shown. However, regarding the display mode of the timer display 920 being different, the number of seconds displayed is not different, but the size of the timer display 920 is different, the color of the timer display 920 is different, the form of the timer display 920 Or the like) may be different, or a combination thereof.

  As shown in FIGS. 42E and 42F, the ball image 911 as the suggestion display 910 directly hits the active display AH, and the active display AH changes. However, after the ball image 911 thrown from the character is once enlarged and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9, effects such as hitting (acting) the active display AH may be executed. Further, when the ball image 911 thrown from the character hits the active display AH, the display mode of the active display may be further changed. For example, when the yellow ball image 911 hits the active display AH, the display mode of the active display AH may be further changed to red.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the data is set such that the jackpot expectation degree is higher as the execution time of the timer change effect is longer. However, the execution period of the timer change effect may be constant regardless of the jackpot expectation (for example, always 10 seconds). In such a case, the color of the frame of the timer display 920 may be changed according to the jackpot expectation, or the jackpot expectation may be different in portions other than the numerals.

  A plurality of types of characters may be provided as the indication indication 910 in FIG. Then, the number of times the ball image changes and the number of seconds on the timer display 920 may be different depending on the timer change effect depending on the difference in the characters.

  The following control may be performed on the timer display 920 displayed during the timer change effect. For example, an effect of stopping the countdown of the timer display 920 for several seconds while the timer change effect is being performed (hereinafter, referred to as a freeze effect) may be performed. After the freeze effect, the timer display 920 may count down again. Further, the degree of expectation of the big hit may be different between the case of passing the freeze effect and the case of not passing the freeze effect.

  The following control may be performed on the timer display 920 displayed during the timer change effect. For example, a special pattern may be provided in which the value of the timer display 920 is increased when the timer display 920 executed in the timer change effect becomes a value indicating 0 seconds. Also, such a special pattern may be executed a plurality of times. Also, each time the special pattern is executed, the color of the ball image 911 may be changed by the timer change effect.

  The position at which the timer change presentation is performed may be changed according to the type of other presentation being performed during the variable display. For example, when the first effect is performed, the timer change effect is performed at the upper right position of the effect display device 9, and when the second effect is performed, the lower left of the effect display device 9 The timer change presentation may be performed at the position. Further, instead of changing the position at which the timer change effect is executed depending on the type of effect, the size of the suggestion display 910 displayed as the timer change effect may be changed.

  The display mode of the timer display 920 in the timer change effect may be changed until it becomes 0 seconds. For example, the countdown may start from 10 seconds, and the color of the number or frame of the timer display 920 may be changed at 7 seconds of the change timing. Further, the color at this time may correspond to the color of the change of the ball image 911.

  As shown in FIG. 42, as the timer change effect, an effect is shown in which the character changes the one ball image 911 by making a beanbag. A plurality of such ball images 911 may be displayed instead of one. Further, at least one ball image 911 of the plurality of ball images 911 may be changed during execution of the timer change effect. For example, when a character uses two ball images 911 to make a move, one of the ball images 911 is changed from blue to green while the other ball image 911 is changed from blue to red during the timer change effect. It is also good. Then, when the timer display 920 reaches 0 seconds, the character may throw one of these ball images 911 toward the active display AH. In this way, since it is not known what display mode the display mode of the active display AH will eventually become, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the timer change effect. In addition, when the jackpot expectation is high, the number of ball images 911 displayed in the timer change effect may be increased. In addition, after the display mode of the active display AH is changed by the first ball image 911, the character throws the second ball image 911 toward the active display AH again, thereby achieving a display mode with higher expectation. And the active display AH may change.

  Although a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine, in the various settings shown in the present embodiment, medals are inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of symbols are displayed according to the operation of the control lever by the player. A slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of the stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbols on the display means are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button. It is also possible to apply to slot machines. Specifically, in the display device such as the effect display device provided in the slot machine, the timer change effect may be executed. In the case of executing the timer change effect in the slot machine, the hold display may be displayed when the predetermined lottery target combination is won. Then, when the player moves the hold display to the active display area in the next game and wins an advantageous state (for example, an AT notifying an operation procedure advantageous for the player) which is advantageous for the player in the game, the timer It is sufficient to execute the change presentation. Further, in such a case, the timer change effect may be performed together with the delay control for delaying the progress of the game. The timer display may be displayed for a predetermined period during delay control, and the display mode of the active display may be changed based on the fact that the timer display has become 0 seconds.

  As mentioned above, in the modification 2, although the mode which performs active reserve change presentation which suggests the timing to which the display mode of active indication AH and suspension indication H changes with a timer was illustrated, the present invention is limited to this. Alternatively, the deceleration control may be performed even during the active hold change presentation. When the deceleration control is performed during the active hold change effect shown in the second modification, the update speed of the timer is changed between the execution and the non-execution of the deceleration control, that is, the timer during the execution of the deceleration control. The update speed may be slower than during non-execution of deceleration control. Furthermore, the update speed of the timer may be constant during execution of the deceleration control and during non-execution of the deceleration control, that is, the timer may be updated at the same speed regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is being performed. When updating the timer at the same speed regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is being performed, the initial value of the timer is displayed in consideration of the length of the deceleration period, and the timer is displayed according to the progression of the effect. You just need to update the value of.

  Further, in the second modification, the form is suggested by the remaining time to display the timing at which the display mode of the active display AH and the hold display H changes, but the present invention is not limited to this. The timing at which the display mode of the active display AH and the hold display H changes may be indicated in a mode other than the remaining time, such as the amount of the remaining sand in the convective line of the bomb and the hourglass, for example.

  In the active hold change effect shown in FIG. 24, it is assumed that the player can select the effect start position from among positions A to C which are predetermined. However, the player may freely select the position by operating the operation means.

  The active hold change effect shown in FIG. 24 is an effect related to the change of the active display. However, such an effect may be diverted to an on-hold change effect relating to a change in the on-hold display. More specifically, referring to FIG. 24, character 930 does not throw the ball toward active display AH, but is directed to throw the ball toward any hold display H. It is optional which target H is to be displayed and at which timing the effect is to be started, but for example, they are determined using the effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 21) used for control of the pending change effect It is also good. However, depending on the location of the hold indication H, the distances to the positions A to C will differ. In order to make the distance relation between the hold display and the positions A to C common even when any hold display H is targeted, the positions A to H are selected according to the position of the target hold display H. The position of C may be shifted.

  In the active hold change effect shown in FIG. 24, when the success pattern is reached, the color of the active display is set to the “final color”, or the big hit expectation level is the lowest first color (blue Either) However, instead of such first stage color, it may be made to be the second stage color (green), or it may be made to be either the first stage or second stage color. However, when the “final color” is originally determined to be the first stage color, it is necessary to limit the second stage color so as not to be achieved.

  The timer change effect shown in FIG. 42 is a second modification of the active hold change effect. However, such an effect may be diverted to an on-hold change effect relating to a change in the on-hold display. Specifically, a timer change effect using the timer display 920 of FIG. 42 may be performed on the hold display H. That is, the timer change effect may be executed as the prefetch effect. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display performed before the timer change presentation is executed is the fluctuation time in which the timer change presentation can be performed, and the fluctuation time in which the timer change presentation can be executed If so, it is sufficient to execute the timer change effect. Then, not the active display AH but the pending display H may be changed by the timer change effect.

  In the present embodiment, the ball thrown toward the hold display or the active display is an effect in which the ball always collides with the target hold display or the active display. However, it may be set so that an effect may be generated such that the thrown ball does not collide with the target display or the active display. For example, it may be considered to replace the failure pattern in which the ball is passed without being hit by the target display or the active display, or to add such a failure pattern. Be

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 may adopt only one of the on-hold change effect and the on-hold change effect described above as the specific effect, or may adopt both of them. Further, it is conceivable that at least one (or all) of all the effects including the modification described so far is adopted as the content of the on-hold change effect. Similarly, as the content of the active hold change presentation, it is considered that at least one (or all) of all the presentation including the modification described above is adopted.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states advantageous to the player may include high probability state (probability state), short time state, and other advantageous states such as high base state.

  In this embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the LED driver board 35 are provided as substrates on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted, but the circuit for controlling the effect device is provided on one board. It may be mounted. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (LED, LED, speakers 27R, 27L, etc.) are mounted. Two substrates with the second effect control substrate may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, the voice output shown in FIG. 3). Sends a rendering control command to a sound / LED board that has a function by the circuit mounted on the board 70, the LED driver board 35, etc., or the audio output board 70 and a function by the circuit mounted on the LED driver board 35 Alternatively, it may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control substrate 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the LED driver board 35, and the sound / LED board, and the control means receives the command. According to the above, the control relating to voice control and LED control is executed, and further, the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 It may be sent to the Even in that case, the sound control board 100 and the LED driver board 35 perform the same display control as the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the play control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in this embodiment. Or display control can be performed according to the command received from the sound / LED board. In the case of such a configuration, the various types of determinations performed by the effect control microcomputer 100 in this embodiment may be similarly performed by the effect control microcomputer 100 or the sound output board 70 Alternatively, a control unit such as a microcomputer mounted on the LED driver substrate 35 or the sound / LED substrate may perform.

  In this embodiment, in order to notify the microcomputer for effect control of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of pseudo sequence, one fluctuation pattern command is transmitted when the fluctuation is started. Although an example has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the gaming control microcomputer is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect (so-called second if it does not reach) Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (so-called second stop if it does not reach) Command) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variable display on the basis of the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer is notified of the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer is made to select a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. It is also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending the first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command. As described above, in the configuration in which the variation pattern is notified to the effect control microcomputer by two commands, the determination result of the display result by the effect process at the time of winning in the second command after transmitting the first command, Alternatively, pre-reading determination information such as the variation pattern type may be transmitted, and effects of pre-reading notice may be executed based on the reception of the second command. Here, the pseudo ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of suspension memories are being performed continuously, although the fluctuation is originally one time corresponding to one suspension memory. It is an abbreviation showing continuous fluctuation. In addition, the term "slip" means effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol stops in the variable display.

  The present embodiment can also be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the present embodiment are not limited to a mode in which they are distributed and provided by a removable recording medium to a computer device or the like, and are stored in advance in a storage device of the computer device or the like. It does not matter if it is distributed by installing it. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter. Also, the embodiment of the game is not limited to one that is executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but may be executed by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

  Although the gaming machine which pays out the game medium to the player's hand according to the occurrence of the prize is described as the present embodiment, the game medium is enclosed, and the game medium is paid out to the player's hand according to the occurrence of the prize. Alternatively, an enclosed type game machine may be adopted which adds game points (scores). The enclosed type game machine is provided with a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls as an example of a game medium in the game machine, and a storage unit for storing the game points is provided according to the ball lending operation. The gaming points are added to the storage unit, the gaming points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the firing operation of the ball, and the gaming points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning.

  In this embodiment, for example, a case is shown in which a plurality of kinds of special symbols and effect symbols of "1" to "9" are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed, but the variation display is not limited to such an aspect . For example, the symbol displayed in a variable manner and the symbol displayed in a derived manner do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the symbol displayed in a variable manner may be derived and displayed. In addition, it is not necessary to change and display a plurality of types of symbols, and the change display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately repeating lighting and blinking of the one type of symbol display. And even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be finally derived and displayed, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol is finally derived and displayed It may be one.

  In the present embodiment, a predetermined value exceeding 0% is described as a specific example as the “ratio (probability, probability)”. However, 0% may be used as the “proportion (proportion, probability)”. For example, in the case where "the occurrence rate of one is higher than the occurrence rate of the other" by comparing the occurrence rate of the predetermined gaming state 1 with the occurrence rate of the other gaming state 2 in the predetermined gaming period, Also includes the case where the rate of occurrence of one game state is 0%.

  In this embodiment, after the variable display result is derived and displayed when it is determined that the display result of the variable display is determined to be the big change big hit, a probability change state that is unconditionally controlled to the positive change state after the end of the big hit gaming state An example of control is shown. However, not limited to this, the probability change determination device is controlled to be a probability change state when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 20 A type of probability change state control may be performed.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a lower tray error detection process in the effect control main process. In the lower tray error detection process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether the lower tray error notification flag is set (S1041). If the lower tray error notification flag is not set (S1041; N), whether or not there is a lower tray error detection, that is, the predetermined number of gaming balls is stored in the lower tray 4 by the lower tray sensor 130 It is determined whether or not is detected (S1042). If there is a lower tray error detection (S1042; Y), the lower tray error notification flag is set (S1043), and lighting of the frame LED 28 is started to end the lower tray error detection process (S1004). When there is no detection of the lower tray error (S1042; N), the lower tray error detection process is ended without executing the processing of S1043 and S1044.

  On the other hand, when the lower tray error detection flag is set in S1041 (S1041; Y), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the lower tray error is detected (S1045). If there is no detection of the lower tray error (S1045; N), that is, if the gaming ball has been removed from the lower tray 4, the lower tray error notification flag is cleared (S1046) and the frame LED 28 is turned off and the lower The dish error detection process is ended (S1047).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 101 can detect the lower plate error, and when the lower plate error is detected, the frame LED 28 is turned on. Thus, the occurrence of the lower tray error can be notified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 101 may be able to detect an error other than the lower tray error. As described above, when the effect control CPU 101 can detect a plurality of errors including the lower plate error, the lighting mode of the frame LED 28 may be made different according to the detected error. The gaming machine 1 may be provided with a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs to be lit may be made different according to the detected error. Furthermore, based on the detection of an error, the effect control CPU 101 may notify that an error has been detected by the sound output from the speaker 27 or the display of an image on the effect display device 9.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in response to the CPU 56 executing the special symbol variation processing (S303), the effect control CPU 101 executes the effect symbol variation processing (S802) and the effect display device 9 Image display control, voice control from the speaker 27, light emission control of the frame LED 28, etc. are executed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 30, the CPU 56 executes the special symbol variation processing to display the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b at period T1 as the variation indication of the special symbol. Repeatedly turn on and off. In addition, repetition of lighting and extinguishing of the 1st special symbol indicator 8a or the 2nd special symbol indicator 8b in this cycle T1 is continued until the fluctuation time of the special symbol set for each fluctuation pattern passes. .

  On the other hand, the effect control CPU 101 executes the process during the effect symbol variation, thereby turning on and off the frame LED 28 at a cycle T2 which is a cycle longer than the cycle T1 during fluctuation display and non-execution of deceleration control. Are repeatedly executed, and during the variable display and the execution of the deceleration control, the lighting and extinguishing of the frame LED 28 are repeatedly performed in a cycle T3 which is a cycle longer than the cycle T2.

  That is, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b in this embodiment have a cycle T1 until the fluctuation display is ended regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is executed during the fluctuation display. Lighting and extinguishing are repeatedly performed, and the frame LED 28 changes between executing and not executing deceleration control during variable display. Therefore, the variation display mode of the special symbol changes during the execution period of the deceleration control, and it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the variation display of the special symbol during the deceleration control.

  Furthermore, when a lower tray error occurs, the frame LED 28 in the present embodiment is continuously lit until the lower tray error is not detected regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is being performed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the lower tray error has occurred by the lighting of the frame LED 28 regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is being performed.

  33 and 34 are flowcharts showing the player setting process (S709) in the effect control main process. In the player setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not a volume meter, which will be described later, is being displayed (S1051). If the volume meter is being displayed (S1051; Y), the process proceeds to S1085. If the volume meter is not being displayed (S1051; N), it is determined whether the light intensity meter described later is being displayed (S1052) . If the light amount meter is being displayed (S1052; Y), the process proceeds to S1088, and if the light amount meter is not being displayed (S1052; N), it is determined whether the sample sound described later is being output (S1053) . When the sample sound is being output (S1053; Y), the process proceeds to S1065, and when the sample sound is not being output (S1053; N), it is determined whether the sample light described later is being output (S1054) . If the sample light is being output (S1054; Y), the process proceeds to S1072, and if the sample light is not being output (S1054; N), the value of the effect control process flag is a value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process It is determined whether there is any, that is, it is determined whether the variable display is not executed and the big hit game is not in progress (S1055).

  If the value of the effect control process flag is not the value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S1055; N), the process proceeds to S1081 and the value of the effect control process flag is the value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process S1055; Y) determines whether the volume / light amount adjustment screen is being displayed on the effect display device 9 (S1056). Although details will be described later, when the variable volume display and the light amount adjustment screen are not executed and the big hit game does not appear, the effect control CPU 101 receives the operation of the trigger button 125 or the push button 120. Is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device 9 based on

  If the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is being displayed (S1056; Y), the process proceeds to S1059, and if the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is not being displayed (S1056; N), the volume / light quantity adjustment screen call operation, that is, the trigger It is determined whether the operation of the button 125 or the push button 120 has been received (S1057). When the call operation of the volume / light amount adjustment screen is received (S1057; Y), the display of the volume / light amount adjustment screen on the effect display device 9 is started, and the player setting process is ended (S1058). If the user has not received the calling operation (S1057; N), the player setting process is ended without executing S1058.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the volume / light quantity adjustment screen in this embodiment, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 can be selected by the operating lever in the range of 2 to 14 setting values, and the frame LED 28 A dialog 5HL which can be selected by the operating lever from 45%, 60%, 75%, and 100% of the light amount (brightness) to be output is displayed.

  Further, at S1059, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the volume change operation by the operation of the operating rod has been received while the volume / light amount adjustment screen is displayed. If the volume change operation has not been received (S1059; N), the process proceeds to S1066. If the volume change operation has been received (S1059; Y), the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is displayed according to the received volume change operation. Is updated (S1060). Further, the effect control CPU 101 receives the volume setting operation by determining whether the operation of the push button 120 is performed after the volume of the change destination is selected by the operation (tilt operation) of the operating rod. A change operation process is executed (S1061), and it is determined whether or not a determination operation is accepted in the volume change operation process (S1062).

  When the determination operation is not received in the volume change operation processing (S1062; N), the player setting processing is ended, and when the determination operation is received in the volume change operation processing (S1062; Y), the volume is set to S1061. The selected numerical value (setting value) set in the process of (4) is specified (S1063), and the specified selected numerical value (setting value) is updated as the volume (S1064). Then, a sample sound output process for outputting a sample sound at the volume updated in the process of S1064 from the speaker 27 is executed, and the player setting process is ended (S1065).

  Further, in S1066, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the change operation of the light amount by the operation of the operating rod has been received while the volume / light amount adjustment screen is displayed. When the change operation of the light amount is not received (S1066; N), the player setting process is ended, and when the change operation of the light amount is received (S1066; Y), the volume and the light amount are changed according to the received change operation of the light amount. The display of the adjustment screen is updated (S1067). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 receives the setting operation of the light amount by determining whether the operation of the push button 120 is performed after the light amount of the change destination is selected by the operation (tilt operation) of the operating rod. A change operation process is executed (S1068), and it is determined whether a determination operation is accepted in the light amount change operation process (S1069).

  If the determination operation is not received in the light amount change operation processing (S1069; N), the player setting processing is ended, and if the determination operation is received in the light amount change operation processing (S1069; Y), the light amount is S1068. The selected numerical value (set value) set in the process of (1) is specified (S1070), and the specified selected numerical value (set value) is updated as the light quantity (S1071). Then, the sample light output process for outputting the sample light with the light intensity updated in the process of S107 from the frame LED 28 is executed, and the player setting process is ended (S1072).

  In addition, in S1081, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the operation of the volume / light amount change button 50 has been received during the variable display or the big hit game. When the operation of the volume / light quantity change button is not received (S1081; N), the player setting processing is ended, and when the operation of the volume / light quantity change button 50 is received (S1081; Y), the accepted operation is It is determined whether the volume change operation is performed, that is, whether the upper end or the lower end of the volume / light quantity change button 50 is operated (S1082). That is, in the present embodiment, the operation means operated by the player or the like to change the volume or light quantity during the execution of the variable display or the big hit game, the volume or the like when the variable display is not being executed Since the operation means operated by the player or the like to change the light amount is different, the effect display device is operated by the player operating the operation lever, the push button 120, the trigger button 125, etc. The erroneous control such as the display of the volume / light quantity adjustment screen on 9 is prevented from being executed.

  When the received operation is a volume change operation (S1082; Y), the volume is specified as a selected numerical value (set value) based on the received volume change operation (S1083), and the specified selected numerical value (set value) Is updated as the volume (S1084). Then, a sound volume meter for displaying a sound volume meter according to the sound volume updated in the process of S1084 at a predetermined position in the effect display device 9 (for example, in the upper right portion of the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 36A) Display processing is executed (S1085). After S1085 is executed, the sample sound output process is executed to end the player setting process.

  Although not shown in particular, in the case where the volume meter display process is performed in a state where the volume meter is not displayed on the effect display device 9 (that is, when the volume meter display process is performed after S1084), the updated volume The volume display is started on the effect display 9 according to the above, and the volume meter display period counter indicating the period for displaying the volume meter on the effect display 9 is set. When the volume meter display process is performed after the process of S1051, that is, when the volume meter is being displayed, the value of the volume meter display period counter is subtracted each time the volume meter display process is performed. Then, the display of the volume meter in the effect display device 9 may be ended based on the value of the volume meter display period counter becoming 0 (the volume meter display period counter has timed out).

  Further, although not shown in the figure, when the sample sound output process (S1065) is executed in a state where the output of the sample sound is not started, the voice control execution data for outputting the sample sound from the speaker 27 is each sample sound output The process data for sample sound output of the selected sample sound output process table is selected as well as the process table for sample sound output arranged in chronological order in association with the process data n (1 to N) The sample sound output process timer at 1 is started to start the output of the sample sound at the updated volume from the speaker 27. When the sample sound output process is performed during the output of the sample sound, the value of the sample sound output process timer is subtracted, and the speaker 27 is updated at the volume updated according to the value of the sample sound output process timer. The output of the sample sound may be executed from.

  In S1082, when the received operation is the light amount change operation (S1082; N), the light amount is specified as the selected numerical value (set value) based on the received light amount change operation (S1086), and the specified selected numerical value (S1086) The set value is updated as the light amount (S1087). Then, a light quantity meter for displaying a light quantity meter according to the light quantity updated in the process of S1087 at a predetermined position in the effect display device 9 (for example, as shown in FIG. 36B, the upper right portion in the effect display device 9) Display processing is executed (S1088). After S1088 is executed, the sample light output process is executed to end the player setting process.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, from the time when the process of S1064 or the process of S1084 is executed, the volume changed by the operation of the player's etc. or the push button 120 or the volume / light quantity change button 50 is performed. The sound is output from the speaker 27, and the processing of S1071 and the processing of S1087 is performed, and the frame LED 28 is displayed with the light quantity changed by the operation of the player or the like, the push button 120, and the volume / light quantity change button 50. Light is output from That is, when the volume or the light amount is changed during the execution of the deceleration control, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 or the amount of the light output from the frame LED 28 from the on-hold change effect under the deceleration control. Changes.

  Although not shown in particular, when the light intensity meter display process is executed in a state where the light intensity meter is not displayed on the effect display device 9 (that is, when the light intensity meter display process is executed after S1088), the updated light intensity The display of the light amount meter according to is started on the effect display device 9, and the light amount meter display period counter indicating the period for displaying the light amount meter on the effect display device 9 is set. When the light intensity meter display process is performed after the process of S1052, that is, when the light intensity meter is being displayed, the value of the light intensity meter display period counter is subtracted each time the light intensity meter display process is performed. Then, the display of the light intensity meter in the effect display device 9 may be ended based on the fact that the value of the light intensity meter display period counter becomes 0 (the light intensity meter display period counter has timed out).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, effects are produced when changing the volume and light quantity during the execution of the variable display and the big hit game, and when changing the volume and the light quantity when the non-execution of the variable display and the big hit game are not performed. The images to be displayed on the display device 9 (the volume / light quantity adjustment screen shown in FIG. 35 and the volume meter / light quantity meter shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B) are different. Specifically, when changing the volume or light quantity during the execution of the variable display or during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 35, the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is displayed using the entire display area of the effect display device 9 In the case of changing the volume or the light amount while the variable display is not being executed or the big hit is not in progress, as shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B, the upper right portion of the effect display device 9 is displayed. The volume meter and the light intensity meter are displayed using only the area of.

  Thus, in the case of changing the volume or light quantity during the execution of the variable display or during the big hit game, in the effect display device 9 as compared to the case where the volume or light quantity is not changed during the non-execution of the variable display or during the big hit game. By displaying only the volume meter and the light amount meter in a small display area, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the visibility of the effect pattern displayed on the effect display device 9 or the effect during the big hit game. Furthermore, during the execution of the variable display or during the big hit game, the display of the effect image on the effect display device 9, the sound output from the speaker 27, the light emission of the frame LED 28, etc. Since a high processing load is applied to the CPU for effect control 101, by displaying only the volume meter and the light amount meter on the effect display device 9 by changing the volume and the light amount, the further processing load applied to the CPU 101 for effect control is suppressed. Can.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, since the frame LED 28 is controlled by the CPU for effect control 101, the amount of light output from the frame LED 28 when the CPU 101 for effect control executes the player setting process Although it can be changed, the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b, the normal symbol indicator 10, Since the normal symbol storage memory display 41 and the like are controlled by the CPU 56, even if the effect control CPU 101 executes the player setting process, it is impossible to change the light amount.

  As described above, in the player setting process in this embodiment, the output of the sample sound and the output of the sample light are executed only in one mode regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is being executed. Furthermore, regardless of whether or not deceleration control is being performed, updating of the display of the volume meter or the light amount meter in only one mode (display start or display end of the volume meter or light amount meter), volume / light amount adjustment screen Execute the display update of.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 37A to 37C, when the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 is changed, the effect control CPU 101 executes the deceleration control during the variable display. A series of sample sounds are output over a period T4 regardless of whether or not they are being displayed or not. That is, the sample sound in the present embodiment is always output from the speaker 27 at a constant speed (that is, a constant reproduction speed) regardless of whether the variable display or the deceleration control is performed. .

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 38A to 38C, if the light amount of the light output from the frame LED 28 is changed, the effect control CPU 101 performs deceleration control during the variable display. A series of sample lights are output over a period T5 regardless of whether or not the variable display is in progress. That is, the sample light in the present embodiment is always output in a constant period T5 regardless of whether the variable display or the deceleration control is performed.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 39 (A) to 39 (B), the effect control CPU 101 executes deceleration control during variable display when the volume or the light amount is changed by the operation of the volume / light amount change button 50. Update of the display of the volume meter and the light amount meter in the effect display device 9 at 2 ms which is the start interval of the effect control in the present embodiment regardless of whether it is set or not (display start or display end of the volume meter or light amount meter) Run. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39C, the effect control CPU 101 operates the operating rod or the push button 120 when the variable display is not executed without the deceleration control being executed. Even in the present embodiment, the display of the volume / light quantity adjustment screen is updated at 2 ms, which is the start interval of effect control in this embodiment (dialog 5HH or dialog corresponding to the start or end of the display of the volume / light quantity adjustment screen, operation of the operating lever 5) Perform display update in HL.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when changing the volume or the light amount when the variable display is not being executed or the big hit is not in play, the player etc. operates the push button 120 to adjust the volume / light amount on the effect display device 9 After the screen is displayed, the volume and light quantity are selected as the change destination values by the operation of the operating rod, and the volume and light quantity are updated to the change destination values by the operation of the push button 120. When the volume or light quantity is changed during execution of the display or during the big hit game, the player or the like operates the volume / light quantity change button 50 so that the volume or light quantity is immediately changed according to the operation of the volume / light quantity change button 50. Since the light amount is updated, the player can change the volume and the light amount while suppressing the decrease in the game interest.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, while the hold change effect is being executed, the hold change effect can be executed at different speeds during execution of the deceleration control and during non-execution of the hold control, The output of the sample sound from the speaker 27, the output of the sample light from the frame LED, and the updating of the volume meter and light quantity meter in the effect display device 9 and the volume / light quantity adjustment screen are either under execution or not during deceleration control. Since the process is performed at a constant speed, the output of the sample sound from the speaker 27 and the output of the sample light from the frame LED during execution and non-execution of the deceleration control, the volume meter, the light quantity meter, the volume It is possible to prevent the change of the volume and the light quantity unintended by the player due to the change of the updating speed of the light quantity adjustment screen.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, according to the player's operation of the control rod, the push button 120, the volume / light amount change button 50 etc. Since the control is performed at a constant speed regardless of whether the deceleration control is being performed or not, it is possible to display an appropriate volume meter, light amount meter, volume / light amount adjustment screen corresponding to the volume or light amount on the effect display device 9.

  In the present embodiment, the display of the volume meter, the light amount meter, and the volume / light amount adjustment screen in the effect display device 9 is updated according to the operation of the operation rod, the push button 120, the volume / light amount change button 50 by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and detection means such as a motion sensor capable of detecting the action of the player without contact is provided, and effects are produced based on the detection result by the detection means. The display of the volume meter, the light amount meter, and the volume / light amount adjustment screen on the display device 9 may be updated.

  Further, in this embodiment, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 or the light output from the frame LED based on the reception of the operation of the operating rod, the push button 120, or the volume / light amount change button 50 by the player or the like. When the light amount of light is updated, it is possible to execute the output of the sample sound and the sample light with the updated volume and light amount, and whether or not the sample sound and the sample light are under execution of the deceleration control. Since the output is performed in the common (identical) mode, the sound and light being output are different because the modes of the sample sound and the sample light are different between the execution of the deceleration control and the non-execution of the deceleration control. It is possible to prevent the player from being misidentified as not being a sample sound or sample light.

  The "mode" of the sample sound in the present invention includes the execution speed (reproduction speed) and pitch, the period from when the output of the sample sound is started after the change of the volume, the output period of the sample sound, etc. . Further, the “mode” of the sample light in the present invention includes the execution speed, the light emission pattern, the period from when the light amount is changed to the start of the output of the sample light, the output period of the sample light, and the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 can detect the lower tray error, and even while the lower tray error is being detected, the operation rod or push button 120 of the player or the like, the volume / light amount change button Since the volume and the light amount can be changed based on the 50 operations, it is possible to prevent the convenience of the player for changing the volume and the light amount from being lowered.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the volume or the light amount is changed based on the operation of the player or the like, the push button 120, or the volume / light amount change button 50 during the execution of the deceleration control, the deceleration control is performed. Since the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 and the light amount of the light output from the frame LED 28 can be changed during the on-hold change effect, the interest of the on-off change effect can be improved.

  In this embodiment, when the volume or the light quantity is changed based on the operation of the player or the like, the push button 120, or the volume / light quantity change button 50 during the execution of the deceleration control, the deceleration control is executed. Although the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 and the light amount of the light output from the frame LED 28 are changed during the on-hold change effect, the present invention is not limited to this. When the volume or the light amount is changed based on the operation of the player or the like, the push button 120, or the volume / light amount change button 50 during execution, the deceleration control is ended or the deceleration control is executed. The volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 or the light amount of the light output from the frame LED 28 may be changed after the termination of the on-hold change effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, a pattern for changing the display mode of the hold display TH as a hold change effect and a pattern for not changing the display mode of the hold display TH can be executed, and the display mode of the hold display TH is changed. Since it is possible to execute deceleration control to decelerate the rendering speed of the color ball 931 acting on the hold display TH at a common timing with the pattern and the pattern that does not change the display mode of the hold display TH, the hold display TH By giving a change to the acting color ball 931, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30, in the present embodiment, the pending display H and the active display AH are different from the pending change presentation in which the deceleration control is executed, regardless of whether the deceleration control is executed or not. Since it is constant, it is possible to prevent these holding indication H and the active indication AH from being misidentified as being indications relating to holding change presentation. Furthermore, since the hold display H and the active display AH in the present embodiment are rotation display at a constant speed regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is being performed, these hold display H and the active display AH relate to hold change effect It can be further prevented that the display is misidentified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the display of the active display AH or the hold display H is started based on the occurrence of the start winning, it is possible to output a winning sound, and the winning sound is subjected to deceleration control. Since the speaker 27 outputs the sound at a constant speed (reproduction speed) regardless of whether or not the player has started to display the active display AH and the hold display H by outputting the winning sound. Can be recognized properly.

  In the present embodiment, when the display of the active display AH and the hold display H is started based on the occurrence of the start winning, the winning sound has a constant speed (reproduction (reproduction) regardless of whether or not deceleration control is being performed. Although the form of output from the speaker 27 is illustrated as speed), the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning sound is output from the speaker 27 depending on whether or not deceleration control is being performed. The playback speed (reproduction speed) may be different.

  Further, since the frame LED 28 of this embodiment can be lighted in different cycles, ie, different patterns, during execution and non-execution of the deceleration control, the frame LED 28 is set to the speed of the pending change effect during the deceleration control. It lights up correspondingly and can improve the production effect of the hold change production.

  In addition, the frame LED 28 in the present embodiment changes the light emission period, that is, the light emission pattern, depending on whether or not the deceleration control is being performed, while the first special symbol repeats lighting and extinguishing as variable display of the special symbol. The display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are always lit with a constant cycle, that is, with a constant light emission pattern regardless of whether or not deceleration control is being performed, so the variation display of the special symbol is a deceleration indicator. It is possible to prevent the player from being appropriately recognized during execution of the control.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are illustrated as the first light emitting means which is always lit with a constant period regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is being performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first light emitting means emits light regardless of whether or not deceleration control is being performed under the control of the CPU 56. 2 Special symbol hold storage indicator 18 b, normal symbol display 10, normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 may be used.

  In addition, although the frame LED 28 of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which lighting is performed in different cycles during execution of deceleration control and during non-execution of the deceleration control, the present invention is not limited thereto. The lighting may be performed at a constant cycle regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is being performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the player can change the light amount of the frame LED 28 by operating the operating rod, the push button 120, and the volume / light amount change button 50 by the player etc., while displaying the first special symbol. Since it is impossible for the player to change the light quantity of the second special symbol display 8b and the second special symbol display 8b, the light amount of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is determined by the player etc. By being changed, it is possible to prevent the player from appropriately recognizing the variation display of the special symbol.

  When the lower tray error is detected, the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b of the present embodiment have the same cycle T1 as when the lower tray error is not detected. While the frame LED 28 lights up, the frame LED 28 lights up in a pattern different from that when the lower plate error is not detected (when the lower plate error is canceled), when the lower plate error is detected. Even when the lower plate error occurs during the change of the special symbol, the player grasps that the special symbol is being changed and displayed by the lighting of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. While being able to do, it is possible also to grasp that the lower dish error has occurred by lighting of frame LED28.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions may be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. Be

  For example, in the embodiment described above, when the player changes the volume / light quantity change button 50 while the variable display is being performed, the update of the volume or the light quantity is performed regardless of whether the deceleration control is being performed. The present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modification 3, the volume / light quantity change button 50 is executed during execution of the deceleration control. When operated, the volume and light quantity may be updated, while the effect display device 9 may not display the volume meter and the light quantity meter according to the update of the volume and light quantity. In this way, although the deceleration control is being executed during the on-hold change presentation, the player can feel a sense of discomfort due to the on-off change presentation being executed at a speed different from the updating speed of the volume meter or the light amount meter. Can be prevented.

  In the above embodiment, when the player changes the volume / light quantity change button 50 while the variable display is being performed, the volume / light quantity change button 50 is selected regardless of whether the deceleration control is being performed. In the embodiment, the output of the sample sound and the sample light is performed based on the volume and the light quantity changed based on the operation of the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the volume / light quantity change button 50 is operated during the operation, the output of the sample sound or the sample light at the volume or light quantity changed based on the operation of the volume / light quantity change button 50 may not be performed. . By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the sample sound and the sample light being output during the execution of the deceleration control.

  Further, in the fourth modification, as an example in which the output of the sample sound is limited when the volume / light quantity change button 50 is operated during execution of the deceleration control, a mode in which the sample sound is not output is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and as a form for limiting the output of the sample sound when the volume / light quantity change button 50 is operated during execution of the deceleration control, the sample sound is output at the minimum volume or volume "0". The output sound volume of the sample sound may be smaller than that of the effect sound under deceleration control.

  Furthermore, when the volume / light quantity change button 50 is operated during the execution of the deceleration control, the output of the sample sound and the sample light is not executed during the deceleration control, but is outputted from the speaker 27 during the deceleration control. The sound volume of the sound or the light amount of the light output from the frame LED 28 may be changed.

  Furthermore, when the volume / light quantity change button 50 is operated during the execution of the deceleration control, the output of the sample sound and the sample light is not executed during the deceleration control, but is outputted from the speaker 27 after the end of the deceleration control. The volume of the dull sound or the light amount of the light output from the frame LED 28 may be changed.

  In the above embodiment, the visibility of the active display AH and the hold display H is not particularly changed regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is being performed, but the present invention is limited to this. In the fifth embodiment, by setting the visibility of the active display AH or the hold display H during execution of the deceleration control to be different from that during the non-execution of the deceleration control, it is possible to execute the deceleration control in the hold change effect. It may be easy for the player to recognize that it is.

  Incidentally, "different from visibility" in the present invention is not limited to the fact that the ease of visual recognition by the player is different because the contrast, transparency, etc. of the displayed active display AH and hold display H differ. By making the active display AH and the hold display H not displayed in the period of 1, it is also included to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the display of the active display AH and the hold display H is started based on the occurrence of the start winning, the winning sound has a constant speed (reproduction is performed regardless of whether or not the deceleration control is being performed). Although the form which outputs from speaker 27 is illustrated by speed), the present invention is not limited to this, As a modification 6, when a starting winning combination occurs during execution of deceleration control, it is a winning combination By limiting the output of the sound, it may be possible to prevent the reduction effect of the on-hold change presentation during the deceleration control.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the display of the active display AH and the hold display H is started based on the occurrence of the start winning, an example is shown in which a winning sound is output as a special effect, but the present invention is limited thereto The effect to be performed when the display of the active display AH and the suspension display H is started based on the occurrence of the start winning is not an effect other than the output of the winning sound (for example, specific to the effect display device 9 An effect of displaying an image or an effect of emitting light from the frame LED 28 may be used.

  Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the mode is exemplified in which the display mode of the active display AH and the hold display H to be changed is changed by executing the deceleration control during the hold change effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead of the effects, the effect of executing the deceleration control may be effects other than the on-hold change effect such as variable display of effect symbols, specific reach effects, effects during a big hit game, and the like. As described above, when the deceleration control is performed in a production other than the hold change presentation, as the modification 7, the display mode change of the active display AH and the hold display H which are the target of the hold change during the execution of the deceleration control is performed. The limitation may prevent the player from paying attention to the active display AH and the hold display H and thereby reducing the effect of performing the deceleration control.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment illustrated the form which can perform a pending | holding change production as production | presentation in a fluctuation display, this invention is not limited to this, As the production | presentation in a fluctuation display, the said fluctuation display Effects other than on-hold change presentation may be executed such as on-the-fly announcement production for giving notice that it will be a big hit, or advance notice for giving notice that the fluctuation display result will be a big hit in the suspension memory. As described above, when it is possible to execute a plurality of effects including the pending change effect during the variable display, as the eighth modification, the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display can be performed during execution of any of the effects. Each rendering effect may be enhanced by lighting the frame LED 28 in the lighting pattern for each effect while lighting the device 8 b in a fixed pattern.

  In the above embodiment, the light is output from the frame LED 28 during the execution of the deceleration control. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light from the frame LED 28 is emitted during the execution of the deceleration control. If you do not want to output. Thus, when providing the case where light is not output from the frame LED 28 during the execution of the deceleration control, as a modification 9, if the ratio of outputting light from the frame LED 28 during the execution of the deceleration control is different according to the number of pending storages. And the game interest may be improved.

  Further, although the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, gaming balls having a predetermined number of balls are inside the gaming machine In addition, the number of balls that have been enclosed so as to be able to circulate and is lent out in response to a player's request for lending, and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of gaming balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines that are stored. In these enclosed game machines, not the gaming balls but points or points are awarded to the player, so the points or points given are the game values.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in order to notify the CPU for effect control 101 of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation mode such as the fluctuation time and the type of reach effect, an example of transmitting one fluctuation pattern designation command when the fluctuation is started Although shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the CPU for effect control 101 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the CPU 56 uses, for example, the first command, a fluctuation time or fluctuation mode before reaching reach (before reaching a so-called second stop if not reaching reach). The second command indicates the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode after reaching the reach (after reaching a so-called second stop if not reaching), such as the type of reach and the presence of re-lottery effect. The command may be transmitted, or only the fluctuation time may be notified by the first command and the second command, and the effect control CPU 101 for the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. The selection may be made by When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending the first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. As described above, by notifying a change pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which must be stored as a change pattern specification command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, although the game ball is shot out from below the game area by the ball striking device, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ball striking device may be pachinko game machine 1 The game ball may be launched from the upper position of the game area by providing the game ball at the upper position of the game area.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the embodiment is exemplified in which only the big hit that can obtain many game balls is generated by opening the big winning opening in the big hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, a big hit for opening the big winning opening in a round game is provided as a big variation big hit, and the player is not recognized that the big winning opening has been opened. It may be a sudden big hit that appears to be in a state of oddity. In addition, when providing a sudden big hit like this, a small hit opening the big winning opening with the same opening pattern as the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the big hit game of the definite variation big hit is provided, It may be made to generate a state (so-called latent state) where it is unclear whether the gaming state after the occurrence of the small hit is in the high certainty state or in the low certainty state.

  Moreover, although the form which made the starting winning opening two in 1st starting winning opening 13 and the 2nd starting winning opening 14 is illustrated in the said Example, this invention is not limited to this and starting There may be only one winning opening, or three or more starting winning openings.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which made the special symbol two in 1st special drawing and 2nd special drawing is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, Only one special symbol is one It is good also as three or more special symbols.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b respectively variably display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol which is the display result, and then stop the final stop symbol Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention stops display of the final stop design after variably displaying a plurality of special symbols without including the final stop design as a display result. It may be That is, the final stop symbol to be the display result may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for the variable display.

  The state advantageous to the player includes specific game states (such as a big hit) that are advantageous to the player who can acquire many game media, and plural types of specific game states (such as different expected values of game media that can be acquired) Big hit etc. with different number of rounds), high base state (time saving state) where the condition of award ball payout is more easily established than in normal gaming state, high probability gaming state (high probability state) And a special reach state (eg, super reach), and a state in which the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern based on a jackpot fluctuation pattern.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value At the same time, one game is ended by the variable display result being derived on the effect display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified respectively, and the winning is achieved according to the variable display result derived on the effect display device The present invention is also applicable to slot machines in which

  The present invention is not limited to the one described above. The specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the embodiment and the modifications described above, and the configurations shown in the later-described form examples and the modifications may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be understood that the above-described embodiment disclosed this time and the form described below are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1), and an effect executing means (for example, a pachinko game machine) capable of executing effects (for example, hold change effect). After the effect control CPU 101 executes the advance notice process, the portion that executes the effect symbol changing process) and the operation of the player (for example, the operation of the operating rod or push button 120, the trigger button 125, and the volume / light amount change button 50) Setting means for performing setting relating to the effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 101 executes the player setting process shown in FIG. 33), and the effect executing means performs the first period (for example, In the non-execution of the deceleration control) and the second period different from the first period (for example, in the execution of the deceleration control), effects can be performed at different advancing speeds (for example, as shown in FIG. 17). As described above, at the time of execution of the deceleration control, the portion regarding which the hold change effect is executed at a slower speed (slow motion) than at the time of non-execution of the deceleration control) It does not change in the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 37 to FIG. 39, when the series of sample sounds and the amount of light output from the speaker 27 are changed when the volume is changed, it is output from the frame LED 28 First control means for outputting a series of sample light output ends in a fixed period, that is, a part outputted at a fixed speed), and further, outputting a command based on a lottery (for example, a fluctuation pattern specification command) A second control that executes processing (for example, step S90171 which is processing for effect execution) according to a command (for example, the main substrate 9011) and the command output by the first control means Means (for example, effect control board 9012), and the second control means may use a plurality of different commands (for example, variation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102”) as the same command (for example, variation pattern designation command) Treat as “8100”) and execute the above processing (for example, convert fluctuation pattern designation commands “8101” to “8102” into “8100” in step S 90752 (see also FIG. 66), and treat as “8100”) The game machine which executes step S90171) is mentioned.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting unintended by the player being performed. Further, since the processing is performed by treating a plurality of different commands as the same command, the second control means can be suitably operated.

  Note that the first control unit and the second control unit may be configured by a plurality of hardware (substrate or processor). Further, at least a part of the first control means and the second control means may be configured by a common hardware configuration.

  For example, in the embodiment described later, the main substrate 9011 is provided with a portion for converting the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” into the fluctuation pattern “8100” (a portion where the common module 90120A executes steps S90751 to S90752). It is also good. In this case, for example, the CPU 90103 randomly determines a variation pattern and generates a variation pattern specification command (which is to be output to the RAM 90102). Then, the CPU 90103 performs the same processing as step S90704 to convert the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” into the fluctuation pattern “8100”. Then, the CPU 90103 supplies the converted command to the effect control board 9012. Thus, the second control means may include a portion of the main substrate 9011.

  For example, in the embodiment to be described later, the common module 90120A is realized by a substrate different from the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012 or a processor or the like provided on the effect control substrate 9012 but different from the effect control CPU 90120. You may do so. As described above, the part that handles different plural commands as the same command in the second control means and the part that executes processing may be realized by different hardware.

  The process according to the command may be a process of executing an effect (a process executed by the display control unit 90123) in addition to the process of determining an effect to be executed. In addition, treating a plurality of commands as the same command means treating a plurality of commands as another command other than the plurality of commands in addition to treating the plurality of commands as one of the plurality of commands. Including. Also, treating a plurality of commands as the same command may be realized by converting the command as in the embodiment described later, or executing the same processing for a plurality of commands (thereby making the same command It may be realized by

  Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the setting not intended by the player from being performed, and as an example of the form of the gaming machine which can operate the second control means suitably, a command based on a lottery (for example, fluctuation A first control unit (for example, the main board 9011) for outputting a pattern designation command, and a process (for example, step S90171 which is a process for effect execution) according to the command output by the first control unit are executed. And a second control unit (for example, effect control board 9012), wherein the second control unit performs a plurality of different commands (for example, fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102”) the same command (for example, fluctuation) Treat as the pattern designation command “8100” and execute the above processing (for example, in step S90752, the fluctuation pattern designation Convert de "8101" - the "8102" to "8100" (FIG. 66 also refer), executes step S90171 treated as the "8100") the gaming machine and the like. Below, an example of this embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other embodiments)
Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described with reference to the drawings.
(Configuration etc. of pachinko gaming machine 901)
FIG. 50 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 which constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 903 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. In the game board 902, a game area is formed, and in this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  Variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided. These are formed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and the special symbol may be a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  In addition, "variable display" of special symbols is, for example, changing (displaying in a variable manner) a plurality of types of special symbols by update display or the like (the same applies to variable displays of other symbols described later). At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stop-displayed (also referred to as a derived display etc.) as a display result (variable display result) (the same applies to other variable displays described later). In addition, scroll display, a deformation | transformation, expansion / contraction etc. may be performed as a fluctuation | variation of a pattern (especially decoration pattern mentioned later).

  In the following, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as the "first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 904B is the "second special symbol" It is also called. Also, a special drawing game using the first special drawing is referred to as "first special drawing game", and a special drawing game using the second special drawing is also referred to as "second special drawing game".

  Near the center of the game area on the game board 902, an image display device 905 is provided. The image display device 905 is configured of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and displays various effect images.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 905, a decorative symbol (such as a symbol indicating a numeral or the like) as a plurality of kinds of decorative identification information different from the special symbol in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game. Variable display is performed. As an example, in the image display device 905, in synchronization with the first special view game or the second special view game, the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R Are variably displayed (for example, scroll display or update display in the vertical direction).

  In addition, display areas 905HL and 905HR are also arranged on the screen of the image display device 905, and the display area 905HL is a first hold display image corresponding to the first special drawing game whose execution is being held (here, The image of a circle is displayed right-justified, and the second hold display image (here, the image of a circle) corresponding to the second special-play game whose execution is suspended is displayed left-aligned in the display area 905HR. Ru. The first hold display image and the second hold display image are collectively referred to as a hold display image.

  In addition, the number of reservations for a special drawing game is also referred to as a number of special drawing reservations. In particular, the number of reservations for the first special view game is referred to as the number of first special illustration reservations. The number of reservations for the second special view game is referred to as the second special view reservation storage number. The number of first reserved display images indicates a first special map reserved memory number, and the number of second reserved display images indicates a second special image reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 9025A is the number of first special view hold memories depending on the number of lighted LEDs. Is displayed, and the second hold display 9025B displays the second special view hold storage number according to the number of lighted LEDs.

  Under the image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided.

  The regular winning ball device 906A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state where a game ball can always enter by means of a predetermined ball receiving member. When the gaming ball enters the first starting winning opening, the first starting opening switch 9022A (see FIG. 51) is turned on, whereby the entry of the gaming ball is detected (in this case, a predetermined number (for example, three) The first special figure game can be started as the prize ball of) is paid out.

  The normally variable winning ball device 906B is an electric tulip type wheeler having a pair of movable wing pieces that changes between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9081 (see FIG. 51) for a normal electric character. An object (usually a motorized role) is provided to form a second start winning opening. In the normally variable winning ball device 906B, for example, when the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 is in the off state, the tip of the movable wing piece approaches the normal winning ball device 906A and the second start winning It will be in the closing state where the game ball does not enter into the mouth (the second starting winning opening will be in the closing state). On the other hand, the normally variable winning ball device 906 B is in an open state where the gaming ball can enter the second start winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilting position when the solenoid 9081 is in the on state (second It is also said that the starting winning opening will be in an open state). When the gaming ball enters the second starting winning opening, the second starting opening switch 9022 B (see FIG. 51) is turned on, whereby the entry of the gaming ball is detected (in this case, a predetermined number (for example, three) ) And the second special game can be started.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning prize ball device 907 has a special winning opening door which is driven to open and close by a solenoid 9082 (see FIG. 51) serving as a special winning opening door, and it is specified that the special winning opening door changes into an open state and a closed state. Form a big winning opening as an area.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big winning mouth door is in the OFF state, the big winning mouth door closes the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball enters the big winning mouth (for example, Do not pass. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big winning mouth door is in the on state, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the game ball easily enters the big winning mouth Become.

  When the game ball enters the special winning opening, the count switch 9023 (see FIG. 51) is turned on, whereby the approach of the game ball is detected. At this time, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as award balls. Thus, when the game ball enters the special winning opening, for example, more winning balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening.

  An ordinary symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 50, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is made up of seven segments of LEDs and the like, and variable display of ordinary symbols (also referred to as "common drawing" or "ordinary drawing") as plural kinds of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Do. Such variable display of normal symbols is also referred to as a common-play game (also referred to as a "normal-figure game").

  The regular game is executed based on the game ball having passed the passing gate 9041. When the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 9041, the gate switch 9021 of FIG. 51 is turned on, whereby the passage of the gaming ball is detected.

  Above the normal symbol display 9020, a general drawing reserve display 9025C is provided. The common drawing suspension display 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common drawing reservation storages, which is the number of common drawing games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 902, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 903, speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect lamp 909 for gaming effects is provided in the periphery of the gaming area ing. The game effect lamp 909 is configured to include an LED.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903 is provided a striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to eject a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area by the striking device. There is.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903 is provided a lower tray for holding (storing) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

(Board configuration)
For example, a main board 9011 as shown in FIG. 51, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 9015 and the like are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 901. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, a power supply substrate and the like are arranged on the back of the gaming board and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (special game, execution of regular game, management of suspension, big hit gaming state described later, etc.). The main substrate 9011 includes a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main substrate 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103. , A random number circuit 90104, and an I / O (Input / output port) 90105.

  The CPU 90103 executes a program stored in the ROM 90101 to perform processing to control the progress of the game (processing to realize the function of the main substrate 9011). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 90101 (variation pattern (FIG. 56, details will be described later), effect control command (FIG. 53, details will be described later), data such as various tables) are used, and the RAM 90102 is used as a main memory. Ru.

  The random number circuit 90104 is capable of updating numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated (updated by software) as the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 90105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (solenoid drive signals to be described later, first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, normal symbol display And an output port for transmitting signals for controlling (driving) the first hold indicator 9025A, the second hold indicator 9025B, and the like.

  The switch circuit 90110 is a detection signal (gaming medium passes) from various switches (gate switch 9021, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 9022A and second starting opening switch 9022B), count switch 9023) for gaming ball detection. A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on is entered and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100).

  The solenoid circuit 90111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 9081 or the solenoid 9082) from the microcomputer 90100 for game control to the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric character product or the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door. Transmit

  The main board 9011 (microcomputer for game control 90100) supplies the effect control command (command for specifying the progress of the game, etc.) to the effect control board 9012 according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Do. The effect control command output from the main substrate 9011 is relayed by the relay substrate 9015 and supplied to the effect control substrate 9012.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011. The effect control board 9012 receives an effect control command, and various effects (notifies the progress of the game, or the game based on the effect control command received) And a function to execute a variable display of a decorative pattern).

  On the effect control board 9012, an effect control CPU 90120, a ROM 90121, a RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123, a random number circuit 90124, and an I / O 90125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 90120 executes a program stored in the ROM 90121 to perform processing for executing effects together with the display control unit 90123. At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 90121 are used, and the RAM 90122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control unit CPU 90120 operates as the common module 90120A and the effect execution instructing unit 90120B shown in FIG. 52 by executing the process for executing the effect.

  The common module 90120A executes effect control command analysis and the like processing (step S90704 in FIG. 59; details will be described later) and sound and lamp control processing (step S90706 in FIG. 59; details will be described later). The effect control command analysis process analyzes the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to specify which effect control command the command is, and the process according to the specified effect control command (analysis result) It is a process to be performed. The sound and lamp control process is a process for controlling the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R and the on / off of the game effect lamp 909.

  The common module 90120A supplies, to the voice control board 9013, a sound designation signal for specifying the sound to be output (including only the sound) in the sound and lamp control processing. The voice control board 9013 has various circuits for driving the speakers 908L and 908R, drives the speakers 908L and 908R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 908L and 908R. Let Thus, the common module 90120A controls the audio output via the audio control board 9013.

  Further, the common module 90120A supplies a lamp signal for designating the on / off mode of the game effect lamp 909 to the lamp control board 9014 in the sound and lamp control process. The lamp control board 9014 has various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 909 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 909 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. Do. Thus, the common module 90120A controls the on / off of the lamps via the lamp control board 9014.

  The effect execution instructing unit 90120B executes an effect control process (step S90705 in FIG. 59; details will be described later). In the effect control process, the execution of the image system effect is determined based on the effect control command specified by the analysis by the common module 90120A (for example, it is determined by lottery), and the execution of the image system effect determined to be executed ( Is a process of instructing the display control unit 90123 to start execution. The image system effect is an effect of displaying the effect image on the image display device 905, and appropriately includes sound output in accordance with the effect image, and on / off of the game effect lamp 909 in accordance with the effect image.

  The display control unit 90123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the image system rendering based on the execution instruction of the image system rendering from the rendering control CPU 90120 Start. In the execution of the image-based effect, for example, the effect image is displayed on the image display device 905 by supplying a video signal. In addition, the display control unit 90123 supplies an instruction to output sound from the speakers 908L and 908R and an instruction to turn on / off the game effect lamp 909 to the common module 90120A when executing image system effects. The common module 90120A outputs the above-mentioned sound designation signal and lamp signal according to these instructions. That is, the display control unit 90123 controls the sound output included in the image effect and the turning on / off of the game effect lamp 909 through the common module 90120A.

  Note that the common module 90120A outputs the above-mentioned sound designation signal and lamp signal based on the effect control command specified by analysis, so that the sound output and the game effect lamp 909 are turned on independently of the display control unit 90123. It is also possible to control turning on / off (for example, when receiving a symbol determination designating command described later, the game effect lamp 909 is lit, etc.).

  The random number circuit 90124 counts up the numerical data indicating the various random number values (rendering effect random numbers) used when controlling the rendering operation. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) as the effect control CPU 90120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of

(Progress of the game etc.)
A game medium (game ball) is fired toward the game area by the player's rotation operation to the ball hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 901.

  When the game ball which has flowed down the game area passes through the passage gate 9041, a common drawing game (variable display of a normal symbol) is started. It should be noted that, when the standard drawing game can not be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as under open control described below when another common drawing game is already executed, the common drawing game is limited to four etc. Execution is suspended. The reserved regular game is executed when the start condition for starting the regular game (for example, no other regular game is being executed or the opening control is not performed). When the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 9041 when the number of common drawing holding memories reaches the upper limit value, the number of common drawing holding memories does not increase, and the passing is invalidated.

  The variable display results that are stopped and displayed in the common-play game include a per-common-pattern (for example, a common drawing such as "7") and a common-use lost symbol (for example, a common drawing such as "-"). . When the symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) per common drawing, it is when the variable display result is "per common drawing". In the case where the common drawing losing symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), the variable display result is "general drawing lost".

  In the case of "per common drawing", the open control (the second start winning opening is opened) in which the movable wing piece of the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the tilting position for a predetermined period is performed. The open control is not performed in the case of "general drawing loss".

  When the gaming ball having flowed down the gaming area enters the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A, the first special view game is started. Further, when the gaming ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the second special figure game is started. It should be noted that when the special figure game can not be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another special figure game is already being executed, or is controlled to the big hit gaming state described later The execution of the special drawing game is suspended with the upper limit etc. The reserved special drawing game is executed when a start condition for starting the special drawing game is established (for example, no other special drawing game is not executed and the jackpot gaming state is not in progress).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning opening when the number of first special view reservations (the number of first special games held) has reached the upper limit value, the number of first special reservations increases. If not, the entry is nullified (a prize ball may be present). When the game ball enters the second start winning opening when the number of the second special view reserve memory (number of the second special view game reserved) reaches the upper limit, the number of the second special figure reserve memory increases If not, the entry is nullified (a prize ball may be present).

  The entry (winning) of the gaming ball to the first starting winning opening that increases the number of first special view holding memories is also referred to as the first starting winning. The entry (winning) of the gaming ball to the second starting winning opening that increases the second special view reservation memory number is also referred to as the second starting winning. These winnings are collectively referred to simply as starting winnings.

  There are a big hit design (for example, special figures such as "3" and "7") and a lost design (for example, special figures such as "-") in the variable display result stopped and displayed in the special figure game. . When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), it is when the variable display result is "big hit". When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), the variable display result is "lost".

  When the variable display result of the first special view game or the second special view game is "big hit" (specific display result), the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. When the variable display result is "losing", it is not controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 907 is in the open state. The open state is either the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or the timing at which the number of gaming balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine), whichever is earlier. It will be continued. Such an open state is called a round game (also simply referred to as a "round"). In the jackpot gaming state, the round game is repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “15 times”) is reached (in the period other than the round game, the big winning opening is closed).

  The "big hit" is set to a big hit type of "non-deterministic change" or "precise change". When the jackpot type is "non-deterministic change", the jackpot symbol of "3" is stopped and displayed. When the jackpot type is "probable", the jackpot symbol of "7" is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, "big hit" when the big hit type is "probable variation" may be referred to as "probably big hit", and "big hit" when the big hit type is "non-probable variation" may be referred to as "non-probable big hit". Moreover, the big hit gaming state based on the "probable big hit" may be referred to as the "probably big hit gaming state". Moreover, the big hit gaming state based on the "non-probable variation big hit" may be referred to as the "non-probability big hit gaming state".

  After the definite variation big hit gaming state ends, the probability that the variable display result will be a "big hit" (big hit probability) is controlled to a high probability state higher than the normal state. The definite change state continues until the next big hit gaming state is started.

  After the definite variation big hit gaming state or the non definite variation big hit gaming state ends, the average variable display time (variable display period) is controlled to a short time state that becomes shorter than the normal state. In the time saving state, one of the ending conditions of the special figure game being executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) and the start of the next big hit gaming state is established first. Continue until you do.

  In the time saving state, the game ball can enter the second start winning opening more easily than the non-time saving state in which the time saving state such as the normal state is not established, the normally variable winning ball device 906B is opened and closed And may be changed. For example, control to make the variation time of a normal symbol in a regular game (the period of variable display of a regular pattern, also referred to as a regular variation time), shorter than in the normal state, or variable display in each regular game It is sufficient to change the normally variable winning ball device 906B between the open state and the closed state in a favorable change mode by control or the like that improves the probability that the result is “per common” than in the normal state. Such control is referred to as high open control (also referred to as "time-saving control" or "high base control"). By being controlled to such a short time state, the time required for the next variable display result to be "big hit" is shortened, and the gaming state becomes more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

  Note that the normal state is a gaming state other than the advantageous state for the player such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, and the variable display result in the common drawing game is The pachinko gaming machine 901 such as the probability of being hit and the probability that the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (e.g. It is a state controlled in the same way as when the predetermined return processing is not executed after the closing.

  The short time state is also referred to as "high base" and the like, and the gaming state not in the short time state is also referred to as "low base" or "non-short time state". A definite change state is said to be "high certainty" or the like, and a gaming state not definite change state is also referred to as "low certainty", "non-deterministic change" or the like.

(Progress of progress etc.)
The "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R provided in the image display device 905 correspond to the start of the first special view game or the second special view game. The variable display of the decorative pattern (which is also a type of image effect) is started. At the timing when the variable display result (also referred to as finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special view game and the second special view game, the finalized decorative symbol (variable display result) that is the display result (variable display result) of the decorative symbol The combination of the three decorative designs is also displayed on the stop display (derivative display).

  The variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established) in a period from when the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started to when the variable symbol is displayed. Here, the reach mode refers to a decorative pattern ("reach variation not displayed yet when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. The symbol “also referred to as a symbol” refers to a display mode in which the variation continues.

  Further, in this embodiment, the reach effect (an example of the image system effect) is executed corresponding to the reach mode being displayed during the variable display. As reach effects, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B, which have different presentation modes, are prepared. In this embodiment, the jackpot expectation is high in the order of super reach B> super reach A> normal reach.

  The jackpot expectation is, for example, a ratio at which the variable display result of the special figure game is a "big hit", and here, it is also a ratio at which the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "big hit".

  When the variable display result of the special view game is "big hit", a finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 as the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern. (The display result of the variable display of the decorative design is "big hit"). As an example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R on the predetermined effective line in the same decorative symbol (for example, when the probability variation big hit "7", non-deterministic variation big hit At the same time, "6" etc.) are aligned and stopped.

  When the variable display result is "loss", the fixed display pattern of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern without the variable display mode of the decorative pattern being the reach mode. There is. In addition, when the variable display result is "loss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination which is not a big hit combination as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ("reach lost combination combination The finalized decorative pattern may also be stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as another image system effect, for example, an advance notice effect or the like for anticipating a big hit expectation is executed during variable display. In addition, during the big hit game state, for example, a big hit during the big hit game state informing the big hit game state is executed as an image-based effect. In addition, as an image-based effect, for example, a demonstration image is displayed when a special drawing game or the like is not executed.

(Main operation of pachinko gaming machine 901)
Hereinafter, main operations of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described with reference to flowcharts and the like. However, in each operation (each process), a process not described below may be performed.

(Main operation of main board 9011)
On the main board 9011, the CPU 90103 executes a game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt process is performed every time a timer interrupt is generated by an interrupt request signal from a CTC (counter / timer circuit, not shown) supplied every predetermined period (for example, 2 milliseconds) It is executed at a predetermined time (every 2 ms). In the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 90103 executes the switch process, game random number update process, special symbol process, normal symbol process process, command control process, etc., and the game control timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed for each timer interrupt. Control of the game is realized by being done.

  In the switch processing, each switch is determined by determining whether a detection signal is input from various switches such as the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 via the switch circuit 90110. It is determined for each switch whether or not it has been turned on (that is, whether or not the game ball has entered or passed). The result of this determination is temporarily stored in, for example, the RAM 90102 and used in special symbol process processing or normal symbol process processing.

  The game random number updating process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main substrate 9011 side by software.

  The special symbol process process is a process to realize the suspension or execution of the special view game, the big hit gaming state, etc. based on the determination result in the switch process etc. (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, Control of the solenoid 9082 for the first prize display 9025A, the second prize display 9025B, and the special winning opening door. In the special symbol process processing, transmission setting of the effect control command is performed according to the progress of the game. Details of the special symbol process processing will be described later.

  The normal symbol process processing realizes, based on the determination result in the switch processing, the suspension and execution of the common-play game, and the open state of the normally variable winning ball device 906B (the second start winning opening) at the time of the common-drawing. Processing (including the control of a normal symbol display 9020, a general drawing reserve display 9025C, and a solenoid 9081 for a common electric character).

  The command control process is a process of actually transmitting the effect control command transmitted and set by the special symbol process process or the like from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012.

(Effect control command set to send in special symbol process processing)
Next, the effect control command transmitted and set in the special symbol process process and transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 in the command control process will be described. FIG. 53 shows an example of main effect control commands. In addition, the following "(H)" shows that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command is composed of MODE data and EXT data.

  The command 8000 (H) is a first variation start designation command for designating (notifying) the start of the first special figure game, that is, the start of the variable display (variation) of the first special figure. The command 8001 (H) is a second variation start designation command for designating (notifying) the start of the second special figure game, that is, the start of the variable display (variation) of the second special figure. The first change start specification command and the second change start specification command may be collectively referred to as a change start specification command.

  The command 81XX (H) is a variation pattern of the special pattern game and the variable display of the decorative pattern (see FIG. 56. Details will be described later, but the execution time (special figure variation time) of the variable display of the special pattern and the decorative pattern It is a fluctuation pattern specification command which designates (notifies) a pattern of variable display of a symbol). A numerical value indicating each fluctuation pattern is set to “XX” (the same as for the EXT data, “XX”) of the command (for example, “00” in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA1′-1). The command is transmitted at the start of the special drawing game.

  The command 8CXX (H) is a display result specifying command for specifying (notifying) whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type (that is, variable display result). The numerical value which shows a display result is set to "XX" of the said command (for example, "00" if it is "loss", "01" if it is "probable variation big hit" etc.). The command is transmitted at the start of the special drawing game.

  The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol determination designating command for designating (notifying) the end of the special figure game (that is, deriving and displaying the variable display result). The symbol determination specification command is used to specify that the variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is ended and the display result is derived and displayed. The command is transmitted at the end of the special drawing game.

  The command A 000 (H) is a hit start designation command for designating (notifying) the start of the jackpot gaming state (which is also the start of the fanfare). The fanfare, which constitutes a part of the jackpot effect performed during the jackpot gaming state, is an effect that is executed at the start of the jackpot gaming state and notifies that the jackpot gaming state has been made. This command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot gaming state.

  The command A 300 (H) is a hit end designation command for designating (notifying) the end of the jackpot gaming state (which is also the start of the ending). The ending is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state (after a big hit during presentation), and is an effect for notifying that the big hit gaming state is ended. This command is sent at the end of the last round game.

  The command B100 (H) is a first start winning specifying command for specifying (notifying) that the first starting winning has occurred due to the game medium having entered the first starting winning opening. The command B 101 (H) is a second start winning specifying command for specifying (notifying) that the second starting winning has occurred due to the game medium entering the second starting winning opening. The first start winning designation command and the second start winning designation command may be collectively referred to as a start winning designation command. The start winning combination designation command is transmitted when the start winning combination occurs (when the start winning combination).

  The command C0XX (H) is a first special-figure hold storage number designation command for specifying (notifying) the first special-figure hold storage number, which is the hold number of the first special-figure game. The command C1XX (H) is a second special-image hold storage number specification command for specifying (notifying) the second special-image hold storage number, which is the hold number of the second special view game. A numerical value indicating the number of pending storages is set to “XX” of the command. These commands may be generically referred to as a special map pending storage count specification command. A special figure reservation memory number designation command is transmitted when a starting winning combination occurs (when starting winning).

  The command C600 (H) is a wait for customer demonstration specification command for specifying that a demonstration image is displayed. This command is transmitted when the special drawing game is not executed.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 90103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S90110 to S90117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 90102.

(Start winning determination process: step S90101)
In the CPU 90103, the first start opening switch 9022A is on (refers to the determination result of the switch processing. The same applies to the on determination of various switches) (when the game ball enters the first start opening), the first The first start winning combination occurs when the special figure reserve storage number (for example, it is counted by the first reserve storage number counter provided in the RAM 90102. The same applies hereinafter) does not reach a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). From among the random number values updated by the random number circuit 90104 or the random counter (the value is updated by the game random number updating process) provided in the RAM 90102, the special view display result (the special view game variable display result) ) A random number MR1 '(one of "1" to "65535") for determination, a random number MR2' (one of "1" to "100") for determination of a jackpot type Value) and a random number value MR3 '(any value of "1" to "1000") for determination of a variation pattern. Each random number value extracted in this manner is set as the reserve data at the top of the free entry of the first special view reserve storage unit (provided in the RAM 90102). In addition, the number of first special view reservation storages is increased by one.

  The second start port switch 9022B is on (when the game ball enters the second start port), and the second special view hold memory number (for example, the second hold memory number provided in the RAM 90102) In the case where the same is true below does not reach the predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), it is determined that the second start winning has occurred, and random number values MR1 'to MR3' are extracted. Each random number value extracted in this manner is set as the reserve data at the top of the empty entry of the second special view reserve storage unit (provided in the RAM 90102). In addition, the number of second special view reservation storages is increased by one.

  The first or second special view reserve storage unit associates random numbers MR1 with, for example, the reserve numbers “1” to “4” in the winning sequence (the order of detecting the gaming balls) to the first or second start winning opening. The numerical value data of 'to MR3' are stored as pending data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the first or second special view hold storage indicates the first special view game or the second special view game for which execution is being held.

  In this embodiment, the special data game which has not been started yet (the execution is being suspended) by storing the reservation data in the first special drawing reservation storage unit or the second special drawing reservation storage unit as described above. (In particular, information related to the special drawing game. In this case, pending data) is stored as pending storage.

  Thereafter, the transmission setting of the start winning command is performed. The start winning combination command is the first starting winning combination designation command (when the first starting winning combination occurs) or the second starting winning combination designation command (when the second starting winning combination occurs), and the first special view reservation storage number specifying command (first starting combination) And a second special view reservation storage number designation command (at the time of second start winning occurrence).

  After the transmission setting, the CPU 90103 ends the start winning determination process. In the one start winning determination process, the above processing (on determination, storage of pending data, etc.) is performed for each of the first starting opening switch 9022A and the second starting opening switch 9022B (thereby, the first starting winning and The second start winning can be detected without exception). When both the first starting opening switch 9022A and the second starting opening switch 9022B are off, the CPU 90103 ends the starting winning determination processing as it is.

(Special symbol normal processing: Step S90110)
Special symbol normal processing is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "0". In the special symbol normal processing, CPU 90103 is stored in the top area (the storage area corresponding to the hold number "1") of the second special view hold storage unit when the second special view hold storage count is other than "0". The numerical data of the random number values MR1 'to MR3' are read out. The read numerical data is stored in the random number buffer for variation of the RAM 90102 and temporarily stored. In this case, the number of second Tokushu Preservation storages is decremented by 1, and the contents stored in the second Toto suspension storage section are shifted. For example, the pending data stored in the storage area (the storage area corresponding to the pending numbers "2" to "4") lower than the pending number "1" in the second special view pending storage unit is advanced by one entry each shift. At this time, the variable special feature designation buffer value which is a stored value of the variable special feature designation buffer provided in the RAM 90102 is updated to “2”.

  When the number of the second special figure holding memory is "0", it is determined whether the number of the first special drawing holding memory is "0", and when the number of the first special drawing holding memory is other than "0" The numerical data of the random number values MR1 'to MR3' stored in the top area (the storage area corresponding to the hold number "1") of the first special view hold storage unit is read out. The read numerical data is stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and temporarily stored. In this case, the number of the first TOC reserve storage is decremented by 1, and the stored contents in the first TOC reserve storage are shifted in the same manner as in the second TOE reserve storage. Also, the variation special-designated buffer value is updated to “1”. The second special view game is executed with priority over the first special view game by the above processing.

  After updating the variation special view designation buffer value, the special view display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol (the special view game variable display result) is determined as either "big hit" or "loss". As an example, the first special view display result determination table (referred to in the non-deterministic state) or the second special view display result determination table (referred to in the definite state) previously prepared in the ROM 90101 is referred to Ru. Whether it is a definite change state is prepared in the RAM 90102 and specified with reference to a positive change flag which is turned on in the positive change state (the same applies hereinafter). In each special view display result determination table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 'for the special view display result determination is assigned to the special view display result of "big hit" or "lost" It should just be. The CPU 90103 determines the special view display result by referring to the first or second special view display result determination table based on the random number value MR1 ′ read out to the variation random number buffer (a determination value matching the random number value Let the decision result assigned to be the present decision result. Note that the CPU 90103 determines the special figure display result to be the "big hit" at a higher determination rate than in the non-probable state, when in the non-probable state. In this embodiment, to randomly determine the determination result using such random number values and a table is expressed as "determine by lottery" or the like.

  The CPU 90103 determines whether the determined special map display result is a "big hit". If the special view display result is determined to be "big hit", the big hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 is set to the on state. After that, the big hit type is drawn to one of a plurality of types (random number value MR3 'read to the random number buffer for variation, and the big hit type determination table prepared in the ROM 90101 and having "non-probability" and "probability" as decision results) Determined by lottery). After that, the CPU 90103 stores the determined big hit type in the big hit type buffer provided in the RAM 90102.

  If the special figure display result is not a "big hit", or after storing the big hit type, a finalized special symbol to be a variable display result (special figure display result) of the special figure game to be executed this time is determined. As an example, when the big hit flag is off, a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol is determined as a final symbol. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is on, depending on the big hit type stored in the big hit type buffer, one of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of big hit symbols is determined as the determined special symbol. Thereafter, the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal processing is ended.

  When the number of pending storages of the first special view game is “0”, after performing the demonstration display setting, the special symbol normal processing is ended. In the demonstration display setting, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo specification command has been transmitted (for example, the RAM 90102 is provided with a flag which is turned on when the customer waiting demonstration specification command is already transmitted). , Perform the determination). At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending a customer waiting demo specification command is set, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

(Variation pattern setting process: step S90111)
The variation pattern setting process is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is “1”. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  The CPU 90103 first determines whether the big hit flag is on (step S90261). Then, if the big hit flag is on (step S90261; Yes), the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined by lottery (step S90262). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is off (step S90261; No), the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing is determined by lottery (step S90263). The fluctuation pattern is to designate a special pattern game or an execution time of variable display of a decorative pattern (special pattern fluctuation time) or a pattern of variable display of the decorative pattern.

  FIG. 56 shows the variation pattern used in this embodiment. In this embodiment, there are PA1'-1 to PA1'-3, PA2'-1 to PA2'-2, PA3'-2 to PA3'-4 as fluctuation patterns at the time of losing. Moreover, there are PB3'-2-PB3'-4 as a fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit. In addition, as shown in FIG. 56, serial numbers (serial numbers “1” to “11”) are attached to each variation pattern.

  PA1'-1 to PA1'-3 designate non-reach. “00” to “02” are sequentially set in the EXT data of each variation pattern designation command that designates PA1′-1 to PA1′-3. PA1'-1 to PA1'-3 designate the same variation pattern, and the special figure variation time also designates the same length of time. In each variation pattern designation command for designating PA1'-2 to PA1'-3, when the effect control board 9012 is received by the common module 90120A, the EXT data "01" to "02" is "00" (PA1 ' Converted to EXT data specifying -1. That is, in the effect control board 9012, PA1'-2 and PA1'-3 are treated as PA1'-1 and various processes are performed (this handling is performed for other fluctuation pattern designation commands). Absent).

  PA2'-1 to PA2'-2 also designate non-reach. These are patterns for time shortening (with shortening) in which the special figure fluctuation time (the execution period of the special figure game) is shorter than the normal time (PA1'-1 etc.). "03" to "04" are sequentially set in the EXT data of each variation pattern designation command that designates PA2'-1 to PA2'-2.

  PA3'-2 and PB3'-2 designate execution of normal reach, PA3'-3 and PB3'-3 designate execution of super reach A, PA3'-4 and PB3'-4 designate super Specify the execution of reach B. “05” to “0A” are sequentially set in the EXT data of each variation pattern designation command that designates PA3′-2 to PA3′-4 and PB3′-2 to PB3′-4.

  In the lottery in step S90262, for example, a jackpot variation pattern determination table (provided in ROM 90101 and having PB3'-2 to PB3'-4 as the determination result (a determination value for realizing the determination ratio in FIG. 57 is assigned to each variation pattern) And the random number value MR3 'read out to the random number buffer for variation, and the variation pattern (variation pattern at the time of a big hit) of which any one of PB3'-2 to PB3'-4 is executed this time Decide on).

  In the lottery of step S90263, for example, the first loss variation pattern determination table or the second loss variation pattern determination table prepared in the ROM 90101 and the random value MR3 ′ read out to the variation random number buffer are used. Any of PA1'-1 to PA1'-3, PA2'-1 to PA2'-2, PA3'-2 to PA3'-4 is decided as the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing) to be executed this time Do. The first change variation pattern determination table realizes the determination ratio of the table (FIG. 58A) in which one of PA1′-1 to PA1′-3 and PA3′-2 to PA3′-4 is a determination result. The determination value is a table assigned to each variation pattern), and is used when the time saving state is not made (non-time saving). The first change variation pattern determination table realizes the determination ratio of the table (FIG. 58B) in which one of PA2'-1 to PA2'-2 and PA3'-2 to PA3'-4 is a determination result. The determination value is a table assigned to each variation pattern), and is used when the time saving state (time saving) is made. Whether the time saving state is or not is prepared in the RAM 90102, and is specified with reference to the time saving flag which is turned on in the time saving state (the same applies hereinafter).

  Referring to FIGS. 57 and 58, at the time of loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern is higher in the order of PA3'-2> PA3'-3> PA3'-4. At the time of big hit, it is high in the order of PB3'-4> PB3'-3> PB3'-2. Therefore, the jackpot expectation is high in the order of Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach. In the short time state, PA2'-1 and PA2'-2 (see FIG. 56) having a short special figure fluctuation time are selected. Therefore, in the short time state, the average special figure fluctuation time is in the non-short time state It will be shorter than when.

  In addition, the determination ratios of PA1'-2 and PA1'-3 treated as PA1'-1 on the side of the effect control board 9012 are the other determination ratios (the determination ratio in the same table and all the tables in FIGS. 57 to 58). It is lower than the decision rate in That is, PA1'-2 and PA1'-3 are hard to select at the time of determination of a fluctuation pattern. Further, PA1'-1 and PA1'-2 and PA1'-3 treated as PA1'-1 on the side of the effect control board 9012 are set as determination results of the same table.

  After one of the processes in steps S90262 and S90263 is executed, a special figure fluctuation time (see FIG. 56) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined this time is set (step S90266). Specifically, a timer initial value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time is set in a predetermined timer of the RAM 90102.

  Following the process of step S90266, one of the first special figure game and the second special figure game, which has a start condition established, is started (the change of the special symbol) (step S90267). As an example, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the drive signal for executing the first special figure game is transmitted to the first special symbol display device 904A. On the other hand, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the drive signal for executing the second special figure game is transmitted to the second special symbol display device 904B.

  After executing the process of step S90267, the variation start time command (the above determination result, various commands for specifying the number of first or second special view reserved memory after subtraction, etc.) as a command at the start of execution of the special figure game Transmission setting is performed (step S90271). The fluctuation start command includes the first fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the display result designation command, and the first special figure hold storage number designation command when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, When the fluctuation special drawing designation buffer value is “2”, the second fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the display result designation command, and the second special figure hold storage number designation command are included.

  After executing the processing of step S90271, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "2" (step S90272), and then the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended.

(Special symbol variation process: Step S90112)
The special symbol variation process is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". The CPU 90103 determines whether the elapsed time since the start of the special figure game has reached the special figure fluctuation time set above (the timer value after subtracting the timer value of the predetermined timer by 1 becomes 0) If it has not reached, the drive signal for executing the first special figure game or the second special figure game is supplied to the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B to be special After the process of changing the design is performed, the present process is ended. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation time is reached (when the timer value becomes 0), it is the timing for deriving the variable display result, so the predetermined drive signal is displayed as the first special symbol display device 904A or the second Supply to the special symbol display device 904B and stop the symbols of the current variable display result determined above ("-", "-", "7" for "big variation", "3" for "non-big variation") The display (derivative display) is performed, the transmission setting of the symbol determination designation command is performed, and the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "3". Execution of the special figure game is realized by repeatedly executing step S90112 each time a timer interrupt occurs.

(Special symbol stop processing: Step S90113)
The special symbol stop process is executed when the value of the special process flag is "3". When the current variable display result is "big hit" (when the big hit flag is on), the CPU 90103 resets the time saving flag and the probability change flag to off. Thereafter, transmission setting of the hit start designation command is performed, the special drawing process flag is updated to "4", and this processing is ended. In the case of a time loss state (when the big hit flag is off), it is determined whether a predetermined number of variable displays that can be performed in the time reduction state have been executed (the number of times of variable display is set by the time reduction counter provided in the RAM 90102) When the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, the time saving flag is reset to OFF, the value of the special process process flag is set to “0”, and the processing is ended. Even when the variable display of the predetermined number of times has not been executed due to "lost" and not in the short time state, the value of the special drawing process flag is set to "0" or the like, and this processing is ended.

(Big hit opening pretreatment: step S90114)
The big hit opening pretreatment is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “4”. The CPU 90103 performs an elapsed time after the transmission setting of the hit start designation command (the measurement may be performed by a timer provided in the RAM 90102, etc., and the same applies to other elapsed times). It is determined whether (a waiting time from the start to the end of the fanfare in the big hit gaming state) is reached, and if it has not reached, the big hit opening pre-processing is ended. When the fanfare wait time is reached, processing for opening the big winning opening (supply of a solenoid drive signal) and the like are performed to start the round game, and the special processing process flag is updated to "5". By repeatedly performing step S90114 each time a timer interrupt occurs, standby until the start timing of the round game (standby until the end of the fanfare), opening of the special winning opening, and the like are realized.

(Big win open processing: step S90115)
The big hit open processing is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The CPU 90103 determines whether it is time to finish the round game. The number of times the count switch 9023 is turned on (the number of gaming balls entering the big winning opening) becomes a predetermined value (for example, "9") (may be counted by a counter provided in the RAM 90102) or round When it is the timing to end the round game when the elapsed time (after opening the big winning opening) reaches the upper limit period (for example, 29 seconds) of the round game after starting the game, the big winning A process of returning the mouth to the closed state and ending the round game (process of turning off the solenoid 9082) is performed. When the finished round game is the last round game (for example, the 15th round) (it may be counted by a counter provided in the RAM 90102 etc.), setting to transmit a hit end designation command is performed, and the special view process The processing for updating the flag to "7" is performed, and this processing ends. If it is not the last round game, the special processing process flag is updated to "6", and this processing is ended. If it is not time to end the round game, the present processing is ended as it is (the main winning opening may be kept open). By repeatedly performing step S90115 each time a timer interrupt occurs, the opening state of the special winning opening is maintained until the timing of returning the special winning opening to the closing state, and finally the special winning opening is closed.

(Big hit post-processing: step S90116)
The jackpot post-processing is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “6”. The CPU 90103 determines whether the elapsed time after the end of the round game (after closing the big winning opening) has reached a predetermined closing time (the interval period of the round game), and has not reached it. , The closed state is maintained, and the process ends. When the predetermined closing time is reached, processing such as opening the special winning opening is executed to start the round game, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "5", and the present processing is ended.

(Big hit end processing: step S90117)
The big hit end processing is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “7”. In the big hit end processing, whether the elapsed time from the end of the last round game has reached a preset ending wait time (time corresponding to the execution time of ending executed on the effect control board 9012), that is, ending Determine if the waiting time is over. When the ending waiting time has not ended, since the ending is not ended, the big hit ending processing is ended as it is. When the ending waiting time is over, the ending is over, so next, it is judged whether or not the present jackpot type is "probable". The big hit type is stored in the big hit type buffer. If the jackpot type is "probable", set the probable flag to the on state. Also, regardless of the jackpot type, while setting the time reduction counter as the initial value (number of variable display executable in time reduction state, for example, 100) (the count value of the time reduction counter is, for example, each special symbol stop processing The number of variable displays performed in the time saving state is counted, and it can be determined whether a predetermined number of variable displays can be performed in the time saving state), and the time saving flag is turned on. . Thereafter, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0", and the present process is ended.

(Others)
In the above-described series of processing, each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S90115 and S90116 each time a timer interrupt occurs after the special winning opening is opened in step S90114. Also, when the value of the special process process flag is updated to "0", one variable display etc. is completed, so various data such as the state of the game control process timer and various flags (next variable display etc. You may want to reset the

(Main operation of presentation control board 9012)
The effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 executes predetermined effect control main processing after activation. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of an example of the effect control main process. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S90701) to clear the RAM 90122, set various initial values, and the like. Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S90702). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 10 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC (not shown). If the timer interrupt flag is off (step S90702; No), the process waits.

  When the effect control CPU 90120 receives an effect control command from a predetermined input port of the I / O 90125 separately from the effect control main processing, the effect control command is provided as a reception command, for example, the effect control command provided in the RAM 90122, for example. Store in receive buffer.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S 90702; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 clears the timer interrupt flag to turn it off, and performs processing such as effect control command analysis (step S 90704), effect control process Processing (step S90705), sound and lamp control processing (step S90706), and effect random number processing (step S90707) are executed. After step S90707, the process of step S90702 is performed. In the process for effect control command analysis and the like, the effect control CPU 90120 reads out and analyzes the reception command stored in the effect control command reception buffer, identifies which effect control command is the received command, and analyzes it. A process according to the specified effect control command is performed (details will be described later). The effect control process process is a process (including the execution of an effect and the determination of an aspect thereof) of instructing the display control unit 90123 to execute an effect according to an effect control command (details will be described later). The sound and lamp control process is a process of controlling voice output from the speakers 908L and 908R and turning on / off of the game effect lamp 909 (details will be described later). The effect random number updating process is a process for updating the effect random number used for effect control by software. The effect control CPU 90120 operates as a common module 90120A by executing effect control command analysis processing, sound and lamp control processing, and operates as effect execution instructing unit 90120B by executing effect control process processing.

(Processing such as effect control command analysis)
The effect control CPU 90120 analyzes the reception command (effect control command received by the effect control board 9012) stored in the effect control command reception buffer in the effect control command analysis and the like (for example, confirms the MODE data) ) To specify which effect control command the received command is, and perform processing according to the specified effect control command. When there are a plurality of received commands, processing such as effect control command analysis is performed for each command.

  FIG. 60 shows the relationship between the effect control command specified in the effect control command analysis processing and the like and the processing content performed for the effect control command. Note that each flag, each storage area, and command buffer in the drawing are provided in the RAM 90122. In addition, “set” of a flag means turning on the flag. Note that the state of each flag and the command stored in each storage area are reset or deleted at an appropriate timing (such as a timing when reception confirmation of the target command is no longer necessary).

  If the effect control command specified by analysis is a fluctuation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, fluctuation pattern designation command processing shown in FIG. In this process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether conversion data is present for the EXT data of the fluctuation pattern designation command received this time (step S 90751). For example, the determination is performed with reference to a conversion table stored in advance in the ROM 90121. The conversion table is, for example, as shown in FIG. 62, for each fluctuation pattern designation command (decision target command in the left column), a fluctuation pattern designation command after conversion (data without conversion if there is no conversion) (right column It is configured as a table to which conversion data is assigned.

  In the conversion table, when the fluctuation pattern designation command after conversion is assigned to the fluctuation pattern designation command received this time, not the data without conversion, there is conversion data for the EXT data (step S90751; Yes) Replace the EXT data of the fluctuation pattern designation command received this time with the converted fluctuation pattern designation command assigned to the command in the table. Thus, the EXT data is converted into EXT data (specified value) specified by the conversion table as converted data (step S90752). By this processing, the converted fluctuation patterns PA1'-2 to PA1'-3 are converted to PA1'-1.

  After step S90752, or when there is no conversion data for the EXT data (when data without conversion is assigned to the fluctuation pattern designation command received this time) (step S90751; No), the fluctuation pattern after conversion The designated command (PA1′-1) or the fluctuation pattern designation command received this time is stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area provided in the RAM 90122 (step S90753). In this way, the converted command is once held in the storage means.

  By the above series of processing, a predetermined command (a command specifying the fluctuation patterns PA1′-2 and PA1′-3 of the EXT data “01” and “02”) among the fluctuation pattern designation commands is treated as a specific command. The image-based effects described later will be executed. Note that the conversion table may be configured with only EXT data. Specifically, the data in the column of the determination target command in FIG. 62 is only EXT data of each command (the MODE data is unnecessary), and the converted data in the right column in FIG. It is good also as data of (mode data is unnecessary).

  If the effect control command specified by the analysis is a customer waiting demo specification command, the display control unit 90123 is supplied with an instruction to execute a demonstration effect that is an image-based effect for displaying a demonstration image. In response to the execution instruction, the display control unit 90123 executes a demonstration effect (for example, counts 30 seconds after receiving the execution instruction, and supplies a video signal of the demonstration image to the image display device 5 after 30 seconds. Start the display of the demo image by it).

(Effect control process process)
In the effect control process (see FIG. 63), after the effect control CPU 90120 executes the hold display image control process (step S90169), the value of the effect process flag (initially “0”) provided in the RAM 90122 .), One of the processes in steps S90170 to S90175 described below is selected and executed.

(Pending display image control process: step S90169)
The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether it has received a start winning command (a first or second start prize designation command and a first or second special figure hold storage count designation command). Reception of each command is performed depending on whether the corresponding reception flag is turned on or whether the corresponding command is stored in the corresponding command storage area. For example, when the first start prize designation command reception flag is on, it can be determined that the first start prize designation command has been received. For example, when a command is stored in the first special-image pending storage number specifying command storage area, it can be determined that the first special-image pending storage number specifying command has been received. The method of confirming the receipt of such a command is the same as in the determination of receipt of another command. If no command has been received, this processing ends.

  When the start winning command is received and the first start winning designation command is received, the number of the first hold display images is stored in the first special view hold memory included in the change start command. The display control unit 90123 is supplied with an execution instruction (an instruction to increase the number of the first hold image) of the image-based effect to be updated to the same number as the hold storage number designated by the number designation command. When the start winning command is received and the second start winning designation command is received, the number of second hold display images is stored in the second special view hold memory included in the change start command. The display control unit 90123 is supplied with an instruction to execute an image-based effect (an instruction to increase the second reserved image by one) to be updated to the same number as the number of pending storages specified by the number specification command. Thereby, on the screen of the image display device 905, when the first hold display image is increased by one, the first hold display image is added right-justified and the second hold display image is increased by one. 2 Hold display image is added right justified.

(Variable display start waiting process: step S90170)
The variable display start waiting process is executed when the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 90122 is “0”. The effect control CPU 90120 receives a fluctuation start command (a first or second fluctuation start designation command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a display result designation command, a first or second special view reserve storage number designation command) judge. If the above command has not been received, the processing is ended on the assumption that no command has been received at the start of fluctuation. If the above command has been received, it is assumed that the variable start command has been received, and the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "1" to start variable display of the decorative symbol, and the variable display start waiting process is ended. Do.

(Variable display start setting process: step S90171)
The variable display start setting process is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process.

  In the variable display start setting process, the CPU for effect control 90120 changes the current fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area) and the current variable display result (display result designation command) Based on the variable display result designated by the display result designation command stored in the storage area, the final stop symbol (decided decoration symbol) is determined (step S90321). The final stop symbol is prepared in advance according to, for example, the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display result, and is determined by lottery or the like (random number value is updated by random number circuit 90124 or random number updating process for effect) Use one of the random numbers for presentation). For example, when the display result at this time is "probable big hit", the final stop design is determined to any of "3 3 3", "5 5 5", "7 7 7" (the determination ratio may be arbitrary) (Eg equal)).

  After step S90321, the presence or absence of execution of the image-based effect, the mode of the image-based effect to be executed, and the like are determined (step S90322). Specifically, the presence or absence of execution of various effects such as advance notice effects and the mode thereof etc. are determined by lottery using various tables prepared in advance in the ROM 90121 and arbitrary random number values among the random numbers for effects. Do. At this time, by referring to different tables according to display results, fluctuation patterns, etc., the jackpot expectation (including the expectation for execution of super reach etc.) is made different according to the presence or absence of the execution of advance notice etc. . In addition, when the fluctuation pattern this time designates reach, it decides to execute the reach effect which the fluctuation pattern designates (reach effect when reach is formed with the decorative design which forms the final stop design) Do. The same normal reach and super reach A to C may be used as categories, and a plurality of types of detailed reach effects may be prepared for each category. In this case, based on the reach effect designated by the current fluctuation pattern, the reach effect to be actually executed is determined by lottery or the like. For example, if super reach A1, A2 and A3 are prepared for super reach A, and the current fluctuation pattern is to designate super reach A, one of super reach A1, A2 and A3 is executed this time by lottery Determine the reach effect to be performed (determination ratio is arbitrary (for example, may be equal or may have different jackpot expectations)).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the start timing of the image-based effect determined to be executed in step S90322 (predetermined based on the relationship between the effect to be executed and the fluctuation pattern) (step S90323). Specifically, effect specifying data for specifying the type and mode of the image-based effect determined to be executed, and an execution-timing-specific timer value (the effect control process timer (provided in the RAM 90122) A timer value counted by a timer for measuring various elapsed times), which is set in advance by the relationship between an image system effect to be executed and a fluctuation pattern, and is prepared in the ROM 90121). Then, it is stored in the timer value storage area of the RAM 90122. If there are a plurality of image-based effects determined to be executed, the effect control CPU 90120 stores effect specifying data and an execution timing specific timer value in the timer value storage area for each image-based effect.

  After that, the effect control CPU 90120 displays an instruction (an instruction to start the execution) of variable display (image system effect) of an aspect specified by the variation pattern of this time and of the final stop symbol determined above. It supplies to 90123 (step S90324). In response to the execution instruction, the display control unit 90123 starts variable display of the decorative symbol (hereinafter, the display control unit 90123 executes variable display of the decorative symbol separately from the effect control CPU 90120). At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern as an initial value in the effect control process timer.

  Then, when the first change start designation command is received this time, the number of first hold display images is the same as the number of hold storages specified by the first special view hold storage number specification command included in the change start command. If an execution instruction (an instruction to reduce the first hold image) of the image system to be updated to a number is supplied to the display control unit 90123 and the second change start designation command is received this time, the second hold display image An instruction to execute an image-based effect (an instruction to reduce the second reserved image by one) for updating the number to the same number as the number of pending storages specified by the second special view pending storage number specification command included in the change start command The information is supplied to the display control unit 90123 (step S90325). Thus, on the screen of the image display device 905, when the first hold display image is reduced by one, the rightmost first hold display image is erased, and the other first hold display images are shifted one by one to the right. When the second hold display image is reduced by one, the leftmost second hold display image is erased, and the other second hold display images are shifted one by one to the left.

  Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" (step S90326), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

(Processing during variable display: step S90172)
The variable display process is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display processing.

  In the variable display processing, the effect control CPU 90120 decrements the timer value of the effect control process timer by 1 and determines whether the timer value after the decrease is 0 or not, thereby enabling the special feature corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern. It is determined whether the drawing fluctuation time has elapsed (step S90551).

  When the timer value is not 0, that is, when the variable display time has not elapsed (step S90551; No), the start of the image system effect (effect determined to be executed in the current variable display) currently set in step S90323 It is determined whether it is timing (step S90552). Here, the determination is performed by determining whether the execution timing specific timer value stored in the above timer value storage area matches the timer value of the present effect control process timer.

  If an execution timing specific timer value that matches the timer value of the current effect control process timer is stored in the above timer value storage area, it is the start timing of the corresponding image system effect (step S 90552; Yes ), The display control unit 90123 (step S90553) is supplied with an instruction to execute an image-based effect specified by the effect specifying data stored in the timer value storage area corresponding to the timer value (an instruction to start the execution). . The display control unit 90123 receives the execution instruction and starts the image system effect specified by the effect specifying data (hereinafter, the display control unit 90123 executes the image system effect separately from the effect control CPU 90120 ). Although the display control unit 90123 can perform a plurality of image-based effects in parallel, by separately executing each of the image-based effects in different layers, the processing load regarding the execution of effects is reduced.

  When it is not the execution start timing of the effect (step S90551; No), after the step S90553, the variable display processing is ended.

  In step S90551, when the timer value is 0, that is, when the variable display time has elapsed (step S90551; Yes), it is determined whether or not there is reception of a symbol determination designation command from main substrate 9011 (step S90571) . At this time, if the command is not received (step S90571; No), the variable display in progress processing is ended.

  If the symbol determination designating command has been received (step S90571; Yes), it is time to derive the final stop symbol, so the display control unit 90123 instructs the display control unit 90123 to derive the final stop symbol (decided decoration symbol) (step S90572). In response to the execution instruction, the display control unit 90123 ends variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 905, and derives a finalized decorative symbol (variable display result). Thereafter, a timer value corresponding to the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set in the effect control process timer (step S90573). The value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" (step S90576), and the variable display process is ended.

(Waiting process per special figure: Step S90173)
The special-image-per-wait process is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the special-image-per-wait process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether a hit start designation command has been received from the main substrate 9011. Then, when the hit start designation command is received, "big hit" is generated, and the display control unit 90123 is instructed to execute an effect (including a fanfare) of a big hit (including a fanfare). Supply. The display control unit 90123 receives the execution instruction and starts the jackpot effect including the fanfare (image system effect) (hereinafter, the display control unit 90123 separately from the effect control CPU 90120 is the jackpot effect Run). Then, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "4", and the special drawing hit waiting process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit start designation command has not been received yet, it is determined whether the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed. For example, it is determined whether the waiting time has elapsed by subtracting one from the timer value of the effect control process timer and determining whether the timer value obtained by subtracting one is “0”. If the timer value after the subtraction of 1 is not “0”, it means that the hit start designation command reception waiting time has not elapsed, and this processing is ended as it is. If the timer value after 1 subtraction is "0", it means that the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed, so it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "loss", The value of the effect process flag is updated to "0", which is the initial value, and this processing is ended.

(Process during hitting: step S90174)
The hit and hit process is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In the hit processing, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the hit end designation command from the main substrate 9011 has been received, and when the hit end designation command is not received, the present process ends. If the hit end designation command has been received, the display control unit 90123 is supplied with an ending execution instruction (execution start instruction). The display control unit 90123 receives the execution instruction and starts ending (image system effect) (hereinafter, the display control unit 90123 performs the ending separately from the effect control CPU 90120). Further, the timer value corresponding to the ending effect execution time (ending waiting time) is set in the effect control process timer, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, and the present process is ended.

(Ending process: step S90175)
The ending process is performed when the value of the rendering process flag is "5". In the ending process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the timer value of the effect control process timer is decremented by 1 and decremented by 1 is “0”, and if it is not “0”, this process is executed. finish. When the timer value is "0", the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0", which is the initial value, and this processing is ended.

(Others)
In the above series of processes (steps S90170 to S90175), when the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0", which is the initial value, one variable display etc. is completed, so the effect control process timer Alternatively, various data such as the state of various flags and the value of the counter (that you do not want to carry over to the next variable display) may be reset as appropriate.

(Sound, lamp control process)
The effect control CPU 90120 receives the effect control command (the command analyzed and specified by the effect control command analysis or the like processing) or the instruction supplied from the display control unit 90123 (the instruction of the audio output synchronized with the image system effect, Based on the instruction to turn on / off the game effect lamp 909 synchronized with the image system effect, the speakers 908 L and 908 R output a voice via the voice control board 9013 or the game effect lamp 909 via the lamp control board 9014. Drive to turn on / off. As voice output based on the effect control command and turning on / off of the game effect lamp 909, for example, the game effect lamp 909 is turned on when the symbol determination specification command or the start winning specification command is received. As described above, in the sound and lamp control process, the sound output and the on / off of the game effect lamp 909 are controlled.

(About conversion of command)
Next, handling of the variation pattern specification command will be described with reference to FIG. The variation pattern specification command is transmitted from the main substrate 9011 at the start of variation and is received by the common module 90120A. In the common module 90120A, if the EXT data of the received fluctuation pattern designation command is "01" or "02", these data are converted to "00" (no conversion of command except "01" and "02") . As a result, the fluctuation pattern designation command for specifying the fluctuation patterns PA1′-2 and PA1′-3 is converted into the fluctuation pattern PA1′-1. The variation pattern specification commands without conversion (“8100”, “8103” to “810A”) are supplied as they are to the presentation execution instructing unit 90120 B, and are used without conversion for the presentation execution instructing unit 90120 B (specification of the fluctuation pattern An execution instruction such as variable display of a decorative pattern is issued to the display control unit 90123 based on the command). On the other hand, fluctuation pattern specification commands with conversion (“8101” to “8102”) are supplied to presentation execution instructing unit 90120 B as fluctuation pattern specification commands after conversion (“8100”) and used (specification of the fluctuation pattern An execution instruction such as variable display of a decorative pattern is issued to the display control unit 90123 based on the command "8100". As described above, in this embodiment, predetermined commands (“8101” to “8102”) are treated as specific commands on the effect control board 9012 side, and processing for executing effects is executed. In this embodiment, the effects that can be executed based on the above specific command are the same regardless of the presence or absence of conversion. That is, the above specific command receives the same treatment regardless of the conversion.

(Effects in the embodiment etc.)
In the development of the pachinko gaming machine 901, a variation pattern specification command (also a variation pattern specified by the EXT data) output by the main substrate 9011 may be prepared in advance in a large amount (if added later, the variation pattern is determined When the table becomes complicated), as a result, the variation pattern specification command may be left over the pattern of the variable display of the decorative pattern that can be executed by the effect control board 9012 (with respect to the variation pattern actually used) Command may be lost). Since the remaining variation pattern specification command can not be used (because there is no effect to be executed), the effect control board 9012 can not operate in response to the command. That is, the effect control board 9012 may not operate properly. In this embodiment, the effect control board 9012 treats the remaining fluctuation pattern designation commands (“8101” to “8102”) as another fluctuation pattern designation command (“8100”) and receives “8100”. Since the effects determined by the execution determination of the effect (image system effect) are determined in the same manner as when being performed, there is no inconvenience such as the inability of the effect control board 9012 to operate for the surplus commands. The effect control CPU 90120) can suitably operate.

  Although it is conceivable to delete the surplus commands, it is not desirable to delete the commands as much as possible because the adjustment of the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern becomes complicated along with the deletion. Leads to In addition, it is possible not to use the surplus command, but in such a case, when the third party performs the operation check of the main substrate 9011 (microcomputer for gaming control 90100), the surplus for the third party concerned. Since the role of the command is unknown, the operation check by the third party may not proceed smoothly. In this embodiment, since the remaining fluctuation pattern designation commands (“8101” to “8102”) are treated as other fluctuation pattern designation commands (“8100”), deletion or nonuse of the command can be avoided. That is, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901 also has an excellent effect of being able to eliminate the inconvenience that may occur when the development cost increases and the operation check.

  In addition, as in the above embodiment, the same process is executed regardless of whether or not the variation pattern designation command “8100” that can be a converted command is one converted from “8101” or “8102”. Thus, the effect control board 9012 can be suitably operated by executing the same type of image-based effects (reach effect, advance notice, variable display of decorative pattern) at the same ratio.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), the change pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” which are the conversion target and the command after conversion are commands output by lottery referring to the same table, so It is possible to easily grasp how the pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” are used, the relationship between each other, and the like.

  Further, as in the above embodiment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PA1'-1 (the ratio at which the fluctuation pattern designation command "8100" is output) is a lottery for determining the fluctuation pattern PA1'-1, or All the lottery including the lottery (for example, all lotterys that refer to different tables in the same process may be all lottery, or all lottery including other processes (for example, lottery performed by the same hardware) Good (for example, in FIG. 57 to FIG. 58, the determination ratio of the variation pattern PA1'-1 is higher than the determination ratio of any other variation pattern), and the variation patterns PA1'-2 to PA1'-. The determination ratio of 3 (the ratio at which the variation pattern designation command “8101” or “8102” is output) determines the variation patterns PA1′-2 to PA1′-3. Or all lotterys including the lottery (for example, all lotterys that refer to different tables in the same process may be all lotterys including other processes (for example, performed by the same hardware) May be lottery)) (for example, in FIGS. 57 to 58, the determination ratio of variation patterns PA1'-2 to PA1'-3 is lower than the determination ratio of any other variation pattern) This may reduce the rate at which the variation pattern designation command "8101" or "8102" is transmitted, for example, a malfunction or the like that can not convert "8101" or "8102" into "8100". It can be suppressed as much as possible. Further, by handling the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8101” to “8102” as “8100” having a high determination ratio, adjustment of the determination ratio in the lottery can be facilitated.

  In addition, making the determination ratio of fluctuation pattern PA1'-1 the highest in the drawing for determining fluctuation pattern PA1'-1 or in all the drawing including the drawing, and fluctuation pattern PA1'-2-PA1 Pachinko so as to satisfy only one of the drawing for determining the fluctuation pattern PA1'-2 to PA1'-3 or the selection drawing having the lowest value in all the drawing including the drawing. The gaming machine 901 may be configured.

  The determination ratio of the variation patterns PA1'-2 to PA1'-3 may be increased to some extent. For example, in each of these determination ratios, a lottery for determining fluctuation patterns PA1'-2 to PA1'-3, or all the lotterys including the lottery (for example, all lotterys that refer to different tables in the same process) It may not be the lowest in all the lottery (for example, the lottery performed by the same hardware) including other processes. As a result, since the variation pattern designation commands “8101” to “8102” are used with a certain frequency, the operation check by the third party can be facilitated.

  Also, as in the above embodiment, the variation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” are commands that are not individually output in lotterys using different tables (see, for example, FIGS. 57 to 58). By this, it is possible to easily grasp how to use the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102”, the relationship between each other, and the like.

  Further, as in the above embodiment, the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” are the serial numbers of the entire fluctuation pattern designation command (in the above embodiment, they can be identified by the serial numbers attached to each fluctuation pattern) or fluctuation patterns. A group designating a variation pattern of whether the value indicated by the designated command (for example, the value of the EXT data) is within a predetermined range (within a close range (in particular, a sequential number)) (For example, refer to FIG. 56), whereby it is possible to easily grasp how to use the variation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102”, the relationship between each other, and the like. The predetermined range may be, for example, a range in which the serial numbers of two variation pattern designation commands or the value of the EXT data is close to, for example, "10" or less. The category may be classified according to at least one condition, for example, whether it is reach or non-reach, normal reach or super reach, fluctuation pattern at the time of lost or fluctuation pattern at the big hit (for example, The category may be configured by normal reach at the time of losing, super reach at the time of losing, normal reach at the big hit, super reach at the big hit etc. In addition, the category may be configured by whether or not there is a pseudo ream ).

  Further, since a plurality of commands are treated as the same command for the fluctuation pattern designation command, the effect control board 9012 can be suitably operated for a frequently used command.

  Further, by converting the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8101” to “8102” into “8100”, processing of handling of the command can be facilitated, and the effect control board 9012 can be suitably operated. Furthermore, since “8100” after conversion is stored (held) in storage means (a variation pattern specification command storage area), “8101” to “8102” can be handled as “8100” with high accuracy (especially, variation patterns) When referring to a specified command multiple times, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load, conversion error, and reference error when converting the command each time. In addition, since the same special drawing fluctuation time is set for "8100" to "8102," even if there is conversion of the command for "8101" to "8102," the decorative symbol variable in synchronization with the execution of the special drawing game. Display and other effects can be suitably performed without discomfort.

(Modification)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment and the like, and various modifications and applications of the above embodiment and the like are possible. Although the modification of the said embodiment is illustrated below, at least one part of each modification can be combined unless contradiction arises. The configuration of the above-described embodiment and the configuration of the following modification may be omitted regardless of whether they are the configurations according to the above-mentioned "problems to be solved by the invention" or the like (in that case Can be another invention).

(Modification 1)
A portion (portion in which the common module 90120A executes steps S90751 to S90752) of converting the fluctuation pattern designation commands "8100" to "8102" into the fluctuation pattern "8100" may be provided on the main substrate 9011. In this case, for example, the CPU 90103 randomly determines a variation pattern and generates a variation pattern specification command (which is to be output to the RAM 90102). Then, the CPU 90103 performs the same processing as step S90704 to convert the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” into the fluctuation pattern “8100”.

  Further, the common module 90120A may be realized by a substrate different from the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012 or a processor or the like provided on the effect control substrate 9012 but different from the effect control CPU 90120.

(Modification 2)
The fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” may be converted into another common fluctuation pattern designation command (a command that is not any of “8100” to “810A” that can be output from the main substrate 9011). In this case, the effect control board 9012 may perform the same process as the process based on the variation pattern designation command “8100” based on the other variation pattern designation command.

(Modification 3)
The effect control board 9012 does not convert the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8101” to “8102” into “8100”, and receives the fluctuation pattern designation command “8100” when receiving the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8101” to “8102”. The same process may be performed. In this manner, the variation pattern designation commands “8101” to “8102” may be treated as “8100”.

(Modification 4)
The type of command that treats one command as another specific command is not limited to the variation pattern specification command. For example, when there are a large number of variable display results (for example, there are many jackpot types), this command may be a display result specification command.

(Modification 5)
A command for effect execution is specified to the display control unit 90123 from the effect control CPU 90120 (a portion for determining effect execution or the like may be realized by another processor such as a DSP) which determines the execution of effect etc. The display control unit 90123 may execute an effect by outputting a command to execute. In this case, a command from the effect control CPU 90120 may be handled as another specific command (for example, the display control unit 90123 performs command conversion and the like).

  For example, display of a corresponding image (at least a hold display image of a hold display image or an active display image (an image corresponding to a special drawing game in execution)) corresponding to at least the hold of the special view game being held or running. It is possible to execute a change effect of changing an aspect over a plurality of special drawing games. The change effect is a type of preview advance notice effect, and it is a prefetch determination performed on the main substrate 9011 (when the start winning, the variable display result is “big hit” for the special drawing game suspended by the start winning, It is executed based on the judgment result of judging (predicting) whether or not the fluctuation pattern designates “super reach”. In this case, based on the determination result (a presentation control command for designating the determination result is transmitted from the main substrate 9011), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution pattern of the change effect (transition of the display mode of the hold display image). Determined in a batch by lottery etc. Then, a command for designating the determined execution pattern is output to the display control unit 90123, and the display control unit 90123 is caused to execute the change effect in the execution pattern. For such commands, one command may be treated as another specific command.

  For example, an execution pattern as shown in FIG. 67 (for example, a change pattern for the second hold display image and a pattern when there are three second hold display images) is prepared, and execution patterns SP1′-2 to SP1 are prepared. The display control unit 90123 converts commands B5001 to B5002 for specifying '-3 into commands B5000 for specifying the execution pattern SP1'-1, and executes change effect. In addition, the part of the content of FIG. 67 is a second hold display image for each special view game executed before the target special view game (the special view game corresponding to the second hold display image to be changed by change effect) It shows the transition of the display mode of. Specifically, the display mode in the special figure game three points before the target at the left, the display mode in the special figure game two points before the center, the special form one before the target The display mode in a figure game is shown. For example, in SP1'-6, the second hold display image of the target remains normal (display mode when it is not changed by the change effect) in the three special games before, and in the two special games The status changes from normal to special 1 (target big hit expectation is "medium"), and from the special 1 to special 2 (target big hit expectation is "high" type) in the special figure game one before (Note that in FIG. 67, the active display image is excluded).

  Thus, a command that treats a certain command as another specific command may be a command used to execute the preview advance presentation effect. In addition to changing the hold display image, the pre-reading advance notice effect also derives a chance eye etc. as a finalized decoration pattern, and even changes the hold display image or the active display image a plurality of times in one variable display. Good. The command used to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect may be a command or the like indicating the result of the pre-reading determination.

  Since a plurality of commands are treated as the same command as the command used to execute the pre-reading preview effect, the display control unit 90123 can be suitably operated for frequently used commands. In addition, the configuration (the relationship of the determination ratio of the lottery, etc.) of the above embodiment and the like may be adopted as appropriate.

(Modification 6)
A command that handles a certain command as another specific command may be transmitted from the effect control board 9012 to another effect control board. Also, for example, a command (for example, a command indicating the number of winning balls) output from the main substrate 9011 to a payout control substrate or the like may be used.

(Modification 7)
The variable display (which may be simply variable display) of identification information (special drawing, decorative symbol, common drawing, etc.) includes blinking of the identification information. For example, it is included in the variable display of identification information that alternately repeats a pattern in which all segments are extinguished and a single pattern (for example, lost pattern) in which at least a part of segments is lit in a special drawing or a drawing. In this case, the one pattern (for example, the lost design) appears to blink). In addition, the variable display may be performed by blinking the decorative symbol or the normal symbol. Further, the identification information which is variably displayed in the variable display and the identification information as the variable display result may be different. For example, a display for blinking one horizontal bar display ("-") is performed as a variable display of a special figure or a common drawing, and other displays ("7" in the case of "big hit") as a variable display result. Deriving and displaying “1” or the like if “missing” is also included in the variable display of identification information. For example, a decorative pattern other than the decorative pattern to be scrolled may be a finalized decorative pattern. In addition, in the variable display of one time, the aspect in which the identification information not displayed in the initial predetermined period is displayed after the predetermined period has also been included in the variable display of the identification information (the special symbol is a temporary stop of the final stop symbol) It may be a decorative pattern that appears for the first time, etc.). The gaming machine may be, for example, one that performs variable display.

(Modification 8)
The pre-reading determination may be performed on the effect control board 9012 side. For example, a command indicating each random number at the start winning combination may be transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 at the start winning, and the prefetch control may be performed in the effect control substrate 9012.

(Modification 9)
In the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is set to the “probable change state” by determining the big hit type at the start of the change, but the open pattern of the big winning opening at the start of the change ( Determines only the round game mode), and based on the game ball passing a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state, the game state after the big hit game state is "certainly changed state" It may be

(Modification 10)
The present invention is also applicable to a plurality of control means in a slot machine, and to a plurality of control means in an enclosed pachinko gaming machine having a game ball enclosed therein.

(Modification 11)
In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the process shown in the flowchart, etc., the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decorative LED The various rendering operations including the above can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

(Others)
In the present specification, expressions of comparison of various proportions such as the execution proportion of the rendition (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”, etc.) indicate that one is a proportion of “0%”. May be included. For example, it also includes that one is a proportion of “0%” and the other is a proportion of “100%” or a proportion less than “100%”.

1 Pachinko machine,
9 effect display device 27 speaker 28 frame LED
56 CPU
101 CPU for production control
100 effect control microcomputer 560 game control microcomputer AH active display 901 pachinko game machine 902 game board 903 game machine frame 904A, 904B special symbol display device 905 image display device 906A ordinary winning ball device 906B ordinary variable winning ball device 907 Special variable winning ball device 908L, 908R Speaker 909 game effect lamp 9011 main board 9012 effect control board 9013 voice control board 9014 lamp control board 9015 relay board 9020 normal symbol display 9021 gate switch 9022A, 9022B start port switch 9023 count switch 90100 game Control microcomputer 90101, 90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 random number circuit 90105, 90125 I / O
90120 CPU for effect control
90123 Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect relating to a game;
Setting means for setting the effect based on the action of the player;
Equipped with
The effect executing means can execute the effect at different advancing speeds in the first period and the second period different from the first period,
The speed relating to the setting in the setting means does not change between the first period and the second period,
further,
First control means for outputting a command based on a lottery;
And second control means for executing a process according to the command output from the first control means.
The second control unit treats a plurality of different commands as the same command and executes the process.
Gaming machine.